JP2021029941A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To show novel amusement.SOLUTION: When separation between a current index (NowIndex) and the maximum variation value (MaxIndex) becomes a certain value or larger during execution of a button successive hitting performance, a current index is updated (+1) until the separation width becomes a designated range or less regardless of a lottery result. The current index is also forced to be progressed to the maximum fixed value by operating a lever member. Accordingly, when a lottery for progressing the current index is not won continuously, the progress of a scenario is not hindered as long as proper depression of a push button is performed. Just before effective time of the push button expires, depressing the push button once can prevent a performance that is nearly identical to a final result from being seen. Further, a player who does not wish to successively hit or long-press the push button can confirm the final result as fast as possible by operating the lever member.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 68

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game.

Conventionally, there is a game machine in which a big hit lottery is executed on the condition that a game ball enters the starting winning opening, and a special symbol is changed and displayed based on the result of the big hit lottery. In such a game machine, when the big hit lottery is executed, the special symbol display device executes the variable display of the special symbol, and when the variable time ends, the special symbol display device stops and displays the special symbol. Then, when the symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the jackpot game is executed.

Further, in recent years, the number of gaming machines provided with operating means has increased. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that when the continuous hit counter value reaches a threshold value, the countdown effect is started even if the remaining time of the effect end timer remains.

Further, conventionally, various methods have been adopted for controlling a game and controlling an effect associated with a game (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-180137 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-165643

In recent years, it has been desired to suppress a decrease in playability.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique for suppressing a decrease in playability.

As described above, by providing the operating means, various playability is exhibited.
However, in recent years, only game machines having similar game playability have been proposed, and novel game playability is desired.

An object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of demonstrating novel playability.

Further improvements in control methods are required to ensure control within the limited resources.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine characterized by a control method.

[Solution Group A]

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above-mentioned problems. The following solutions and the wording in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solution can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can be made into a higher concept by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution uses an operation means capable of accepting an operation input and the operation means to execute a stepwise effect in which the stage of the effect is gradually advanced from the first stage to the final stage. If a predetermined condition is not satisfied between the start and the end of the effective stage effect execution means for enabling the operation of the operation means and the effective time for enabling the operation of the operation means, the stage effect effect is produced according to the first progress mode. If the predetermined condition is satisfied, a progress effect executing means that enables the progress effect to advance the stage of the effect of the stage effect by a second progress mode different from the first progress mode. It is a game machine characterized by being provided with.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations.
(1) An operation means (push button, lever member, cross button, etc.) capable of accepting operation input (operation by a player, one press, repeated hits, long press, etc.) is provided.

(2) Using the operation means of (1) above, a stepwise effect (button effect, button press effect, button repeated press effect, button long press effect, etc.) in which the stage of the effect is gradually advanced from the first stage to the final stage. Lever member operation effect, etc.) can be executed.

The staged effect may be an effect in which the stage of the effect reaches the final stage, or may be an effect in which the final stage is not reached. Further, the stepwise effect may be an effect in which the stages of the effect do not progress step by step (an effect that progresses to an arbitrary stage such as skipping one step).

In the staged production, if the stage of the production reaches the final stage, it can be regarded as a success, and if the stage of the production does not reach the final stage, it can be regarded as a failure. If it succeeds, it is more advantageous for the player than if it fails (a big hit, a suggestion of the expectation of winning, a production that develops into another production, a reach production, a probabilistic promotion production, a round). (Continuous production, etc.) can be executed.

(3) If the predetermined conditions are not satisfied from the start to the end of the effective time for validating the operation of the operation means of (1) above (if the lever member is not operated, MaxIndex and NowIndex). If the divergence of is not more than a certain number), the stage of the stage production is advanced according to the first progress mode, and if the predetermined conditions are satisfied (if the lever member is operated, the divergence between MaxIndex and NowIndex is generated. (If it is a certain number or more), it is possible to execute the progress effect that advances the stage of the effect of the stage effect by the second progress mode different from the first progress mode.

Here, "different" may mean a mode in which the progress of the stages of the stage production is different (for example, one progresses one step at a time, but the other does not progress one step at a time). The progress may be different, but the progress timing may be different (for example, one progresses one step at a time and the other progresses one step at a time, but the timing of progress is different).

According to the present solution, the progress of the stepwise effect differs depending on whether or not the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Therefore, as compared with the method in which there is only one type of progress of the stepwise effect, the effect is produced. The variation can be increased, and as a result, a novel playability can be exhibited.

SOLUTION: In any of the above-mentioned solving means, the gaming machine of the present solving means includes the first operating means and the second operating means, and the progress effect executing means is the first operating means. Is operated, the progress effect can be executed, and when the second operation means is operated, a special notification effect for notifying the final result of the stage effect can be executed. It is a machine.

The following features are added in the present solution.
(1) The operating means includes a first operating means (push button) and a second operating means (lever member).
(2) The progress effect execution means enables the progress effect to be executed when the first operation means is operated.
(3) When the second operating means is operated, the progress effect executing means can execute a special notification effect for notifying the final result of the stage effect. When executing the special notification effect, the special notification effect may be executed after the progress effect is executed, or the special notification effect may be executed without executing the progress effect. In the special notification effect, the result of success or the result of failure can be notified.

According to the present solution, the content of the effect differs depending on whether the first operating means is operated or the second operating means is operated. Therefore, the same effect is executed regardless of which operating means is operated. Compared with the method or the method in which only one of the operating means can be operated, the variation of the production can be increased, and as a result, a novel playability can be exhibited.

Further, according to the present solution means, if the second operating means is operated, the final result of the stage effect is notified, so that the player can quickly confirm the final result.

Solution 3: In any of the above-mentioned solutions, the gaming machine of the present solution sets the stage of the effect of the stage effect one step at a time according to the passage of the effective time. It is a mode for advancing to a stage, and the second progress mode is a mode in which the stage of the production of the stage production is advanced to the next stage step by step regardless of the passage of the effective time. Is.

The following features are added in the present solution.
(1) The first mode of progress is a mode in which the stage of the stage effect is advanced one step at a time to the next stage according to the passage of the effective time.

(2) The second progress mode is a mode in which the stage of the stage production is advanced one step at a time to the next stage regardless of the passage of the effective time.

According to this solution, the stage of the staged production is advanced one step at a time according to the passage of the effective time, or the stage of the staged production is staged one step regardless of the passage of the effective time. Since it advances to the next stage one by one, regardless of how the effective time elapses, it is possible to surely advance the stage of the stage production to the next stage one step at a time, and as a result, it is novel. It is possible to demonstrate a good playability.

[Solution B group]

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above-mentioned problems. The wording in parentheses below is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solution can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can be made into a higher concept by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

SOLUTION: The gaming machine of the present solution means an effect operation executing means for executing an effect operation and an effect control means for issuing an effect operation command for uniquely specifying an effect operation to be executed by the effect operation execution means. When a storage means capable of storing the effect operation command and one effect operation associated with one or more of the effect operation commands are specified with reference to the effect operation command and a predetermined condition is not satisfied. The specified effect operation is executed by the effect operation executing means, while at least a part of the specified effect operation is restricted and executed by the effect operation executing means when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is equipped with a production operation control means that enables this.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following features.
(1) When a game ball is launched, it flows down in the game area while being guided by obstacle nails, windmills, structures, etc., and in the process, it passes through some area or enters various entrances. To do. The progress of the game is controlled according to these events that occur in the game area.

(2) As the game progresses, various effects are executed by the effect execution means. The effect operation executing means is a device that executes the effect operation, and examples thereof include a liquid crystal display, a speaker, a lamp, and a movable body.

(3) The progress of the effect is controlled by the effect control means. Specifically, the effect control means issues an effect operation command (for example, a command) for uniquely specifying the effect operation to be executed by the effect operation execution means of the above (2), whereby an instruction regarding the effect is given. To.

(4) The effect operation command of (3) above can be temporarily stored by a storage means (for example, RAM).

(5) Execution of the effect operation by the effect operation execution means of the above (2) is controlled by the effect operation control means. Specifically, the effect operation control means first refers to the effect operation command. The reference may be performed on the effect operation command stored in the storage means of (4) above, or may be performed on the effect operation command stored in the storage means and then transferred or the like. .. In any case, the effect operation control means refers to the same effect operation command issued by the effect control means. Then, one effect operation associated with one or more effect operation commands is specified and executed by the effect operation execution means of the above (2). That is, the effect operation command and the effect operation may be associated with each other on a one-to-one basis or on a many-to-one basis.

Further, when the effect operation control means does not satisfy a predetermined condition (for example, occurrence of an abnormality or an error), the effect operation control means causes the effect operation execution means to execute the specified effect operation. On the other hand, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an abnormality or an error occurs), at least a part of the specified effect operation can be restricted and executed by the effect operation executing means. .. As a result of such control, when a part is restricted, only the unrestricted part of the specified effect operation is executed by the effect operation execution means, and when all are restricted, the specific effect operation is specified. The effected action will not be executed at all.

As for the content of the effect operation to be executed by the device (effect execution means), first, an instruction as a whole (instruction by the effect control means) is given, and based on the instruction, the control means (effect operation control means) on the device side further produces the effect. Generally, a lottery is performed and the final decision is made based on the lottery result, that is, the content is decided by adding a random element to the instruction as a whole. In this case, the control by the control means on the device side tends to be complicated.

On the other hand, in the present solution means, the control means on the device side causes the device to execute the effect operation associated with the effect operation command without further performing the effect lottery. Therefore, according to the present solution, the control by the control means on the device side can be simply implemented, and as a result, the execution of the effect operation can be efficiently controlled.

Solution 2: The gaming machine of the present solution includes, in Solution 1, a plurality of types of the effect operation execution means and a plurality of types of the effect operation control means corresponding to the individual effect operation execution means. , The plurality of types of the effect operation control means cause the corresponding effect operation execution means to execute an effect operation unique to each of the effect operation execution means associated with the same effect operation command. Is possible.

The following features are added to the present solution.
(6) As the effect executing means of the above (2), a plurality of types of devices (for example, a plurality of devices among a liquid crystal display, a speaker, a lamp, a movable body, and the like) are provided.

(7) Further, as the effect operation control means of the above (5), when a plurality of types of effect operation control means (for example, when a plurality of types of devices are a liquid crystal display and a speaker) corresponding to each type of device, A display control unit corresponding to the liquid crystal display and a voice control unit corresponding to the speaker) are provided.

(8) The plurality of types of effect operation control means of the above (7) give the corresponding effect operation execution means a unique effect operation unique to each effect operation execution means associated with the same effect operation command. (For example, when the effect operation command is "conversation notice 1", the liquid crystal display is made to display the effect image associated with "conversation notice 1", and the speaker is made to execute "conversation notice 1". The output of the voice associated with "" can be executed). Depending on the situation, one of the effect operation executing means may not execute the effect operation. For example, when an effect operation command unrelated to any one of a plurality of types of effect operation execution means is issued, the effect operation execution means does not execute the effect operation according to the effect operation command.

According to the present solution, since it is possible to cause a plurality of types of devices to execute an effect operation unique to each device associated with the same effect operation command, a plurality of types of devices can be executed by the same effect operation command. The movements of the above can be controlled collectively, and the execution of the effect movement can be controlled more efficiently.

Solution 3: The gaming machine of the present solution has a lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game in the solution means 1 or 2, and a lottery when the predetermined lottery is executed. A symbol display means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner over a variable time determined according to the result and then stopping and displaying the symbol, and a predetermined effect symbol displayed corresponding to the symbol are varied within the variable time of the symbol. Further provided with a pseudo-variation effect executing means for executing a pseudo-variation effect capable of pseudo-stopping the effect symbol once or a plurality of times during the fluctuation, the storage means is related to the pseudo-variation effect. It has a pseudo area for temporarily storing the effect command issued as a result.

The following features are added to the present solution.
(9) When a lottery opportunity occurs during the game (when a game ball enters the starting winning opening), a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed by the lottery execution means.

(10) When the predetermined lottery of the above (9) is executed, the symbol (special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed by the symbol display means over a variable time determined according to the lottery result. The stop display mode of the symbol represents the result of a predetermined lottery.

(11) Within the fluctuation time of (10) above, the pseudo-variation effect is executed by the pseudo-variation effect executing means, and a predetermined effect symbol displayed corresponding to the symbol (for example, the effect symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display). ) Is displayed in a variable manner. Further, during this variable display, the effect symbol may be stopped in a pseudo manner once or a plurality of times. In other words, during the execution of the pseudo-variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbol may be stopped in a pseudo manner, and if the variation until the effect symbol is pseudo-stopped is regarded as the pseudo-variation, the variation of the symbol In some cases, the final fluctuation (main fluctuation) is made after the pseudo fluctuation is performed 0 times or more.

(12) The storage means of the above (4) is provided with a pseudo area. In this pseudo area, an effect command issued in connection with the pseudo variation effect of (11) is temporarily stored.

Before the start of the change of the symbol, the contents of the effect executed after the start of the change, that is, the various effects executed in connection with the pseudo-variation effect (pseudo-variation and the main variation) are determined according to the result of the effect lottery or the like. , A production command corresponding to the determined content of the production is issued. According to the present solution, since the storage means is provided with the pseudo area, the effect command issued in connection with the pseudo variation effect can be temporarily stored in the pseudo area.

Solution 4: In Solution 3, the effect control means issues the effect command for an effect in any of a plurality of effect modes in which effects having different characteristics are executed. The storage means has, for each effect mode, a number of pseudo areas corresponding to the maximum number of pseudo stops in the pseudo-variation effect that can be executed in the effect mode.

(13) A plurality of production modes (for example, earth mode and space mode) in which effects having different characteristics are executed are prepared, and the production in one of the production modes (for example, the production mode selected by the player) is related. The effect command is issued by the effect control means of (3) above.

(14) In the storage means of the above (4), the pseudo area of the above (12) is provided for each of the effect modes of the above (13). Specifically, a few minutes according to the maximum number of pseudo stops in the pseudo-variation effect (11) that can be executed in each effect mode (for example, 6 times in the earth mode and 30 times in the space mode). Pseudo area (for example, the number of pseudo areas obtained by adding 1 to the maximum number of pseudo stops in each mode: 7 pseudo areas for the earth mode and 31 pseudo areas for the space mode. Areas for use) are provided respectively.

In the present solution, pseudo areas are provided for each effect mode, and the number of pseudo areas corresponding to the number of pseudo stops is provided for each effect mode. Therefore, according to the present solution, the structure in the simulated area can be made a structure suitable for use in each effect mode, and the simulated area is secured for a number of minutes suitable for use in each effect mode. Therefore, the usage amount of the internal area of the storage means can be minimized without securing an unnecessary area for the pseudo area. In addition, since the size of the area reserved for the simulated area in each effect mode is minimized, the simulated area can be initialized in a short time, and the efficiency of the control process is improved. It becomes possible.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in playability.

According to the present invention, a novel game property can be exhibited.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by a control method.

[FIGS. 1 to 86: Embodiment A] It is a front view of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a front view which shows the part of the game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an interrupt management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of the special symbol game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a figure which shows the constituent column of the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the constituent column of the 2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table by a symbol at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the large prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of passing a specific area. It is a figure which shows an example of the open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the solenoid management processing. It is a timing chart which shows the movable pattern of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in a drive mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in a drive mode. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. (1/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. (2/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. (3/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. (4/4). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game (1/2). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (3/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (2/2). It is a figure which shows the 1st effect example of the button repeated hitting effect executed during the reach effect (1/4). It is a figure which shows the 1st effect example of the button repeated hitting effect executed during the reach effect (2/4). It is a figure which shows the 1st effect example of the button repeated hitting effect executed during the reach effect (3/4). It is a figure which shows the 1st effect example of the button repeated hitting effect executed during the reach effect (4/4). It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect example of the button repeated hitting effect executed during the reach effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect example of the button repeated hitting effect executed during the reach effect. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the display stop display of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of operation of a variable winning device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the time saving medium and the pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the button repeated hitting effect management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the button continuous press effect selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the start of a button repeated press effect. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during execution of a button continuous press effect. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a button pressing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a lever input process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the end of a button repeated press effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the success scenario and the failure scenario of the button repeated hitting production. It is a figure which shows the operation image of a success scenario. It is a figure which shows the operation image of a failure scenario. [FIGS. 87 to 164: Embodiment B] It is a front view of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a front view which shows the part of the game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in an effect control device. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process in preparation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an interrupt management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of the special symbol game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a figure which shows the list of the fluctuation pattern table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern in the case where the fluctuation of a jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot from the non-time shortening state, and the fluctuation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern in the case where the fluctuation of a jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortened state. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot from the time shortening state, and the fluctuation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table by a symbol at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the large prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of passing a specific area. It is a figure which shows an example of the open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the time shortening state. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (3/3). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game (1/2). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (3/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (2/2). It is a figure which shows the flow of the game regarding a game state and a launch direction. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management processing. It is a table which compares and shows two effect modes which can be selected in a drive mode. It is a figure explaining the usage mode of RAM in an effect control device. It is a figure explaining the usage mode of the execution area, the pseudo area for earth mode, and the pseudo area for space mode. It is a figure which shows the use example of the execution area at each time point after the change start of a special symbol. It is a figure explaining the flow of the command stored in the execution area. It is a figure explaining the usage mode of RAM in the effect control device as a comparative example. It is a table which compares the embodiment and the comparative example with respect to the usage mode of a RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the display stop display of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of operation of a variable winning device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the time saving medium and the pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the drum unit production management processing. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the special fluctuation pattern of the measures for immediate termination of a villa state. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the special variation pattern considering irregular hitting.

The present invention presents a plurality of [Embodiment A], [Embodiment B], and the like below. Each of these plurality of embodiments (which are largely distinguished as [Embodiment A], [Embodiment B], etc.) is a single embodiment, and terms, symbols, and procedures used to describe each embodiment. (Step number), means name, etc., including those shown in the figure, may be the same as those used in the description of one embodiment and those used in the description of another embodiment, but one embodiment. When used in the above description, it is only for the one embodiment alone. For example, when [Embodiment A] is presented at the beginning of the explanation, the terms used in the following explanations are terms for [Embodiment A] and are not used in other explanations such as [Embodiment B]. Means that. Similarly, when another [Embodiment B] is presented at the beginning of the explanation, it is a term used for the explanation of [Embodiment B], and is used for other explanations of [Embodiment A], [Embodiment C], and the like. It means that it is not. Similarly, in the description, the cases of "this embodiment", "one embodiment", "another embodiment", "other embodiments", etc. are also used in the explanation of one embodiment. It is about the embodiment alone. Regarding the plurality of embodiments presented, it is possible to combine the configurations of the respective embodiments with each other, and the combination of the respective configurations is not excluded among the plurality of embodiments. Therefore, the present invention also includes aspects in which the configuration of one embodiment is combined with the configuration of another embodiment.

[Embodiment A]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of balls. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

[Overall configuration of the game machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side thereof when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 provides fasteners such as screws to island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 1. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, with the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 closed to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the amusement park inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above-mentioned game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 above behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the plate receiving unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to the CR unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It is paid out to the plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium loaded in the CR unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is given as an example of a model connected to the CR unit, but may be a model not connected to the CR unit.

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can push the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example, to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game ball is received in, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the grip unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 to launch (drive) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 so as to be connected below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (without reference numeral). The glass frame decorative lamp 52 includes a button lamp built in the push button 45a.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, emitting light from the built-in LED (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, the outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, and the like (general sound) to execute the effect.

[Operating means]
Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an operation unit 45 is installed so as to project upward from the upper plate 6b on the front surface side (operation means). A circular push button 45a is arranged in the center of the operation unit 45, and a rod-shaped lever member 45b is arranged on the left side of the push button 45a. The operation unit 45 can accept operations in various situations shown in the production. In one scene of the production, the push button 45a is pressed by the player, and in another scene, the lever member 45b is pulled toward the front side by the player. By operating the operation unit 45 in various modes, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbol is changing, the jackpot is confirmed, or the jackpot is hit. It is possible to generate some kind of effect (preliminary effect, probabilistic promotion effect, promotion effect during a major role, etc.) during the game. The operation unit 45 (push button 45a and lever member 45b) is an operation means capable of receiving an operation input by a player. In the present embodiment, the push button 45a is the first operating means, and the lever member 45b is the second operating means.

Further, around the push button 45a, a ring-shaped portion 45c is installed so as to surround the push button 45a. Unlike the push button 45a and the lever member 45b, the ring-shaped portion 45c is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pulling operation of the lever member 45b. Further, the ring-shaped portion 45c has a plurality of cells separated in the circumferential direction at regular intervals. Although these cells cannot accept operations by the player, they are effectively used in situations where the player is informed of the operation method.

When requesting some operation from the player, a reduced version image (button image) showing the operation method of the operation unit 45 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. At this time, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (operation effective time), the ring-shaped portion 45c in the reduced image is expressed as if each cell is a lamp. To. More specifically, in the ring-shaped portion in the reduced image, all the cells are turned on and displayed when the operation is possible, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. Then, when the remaining time is exhausted, all the cells are turned off. The actual ring-shaped portion 45c does not have a light source and does not turn on / off unlike the ring-shaped portion shown in the reduced version image displayed on the liquid crystal screen, but the ring-shaped portion in the reduced version image is turned on and off. By switching the lighting / extinguishing of the unit in this way, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation. A light source (LED) may be arranged in the ring-shaped portion 45c.

Further, the push button 45a can be projected upward when a predetermined trigger occurs in the progress of the game. The push button 45a has a button lamp (light source) inside. The push button 45a normally emits light in the default color (for example, white), but if the expectation of winning is high, it may emit light in a colored color (blue or red), and may emit more colorfully when protruding. it can. By projecting the push button 45a, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pressing operation of the button at the time of projecting is particularly important.

In the present embodiment, the push button 45a and the lever member 45b are mounted on the same operation unit 45, but the push button 45a and the lever member 45b may be provided as independent operating means. Further, these operating means may be arranged at a close position or may be arranged at a distant position.
Further, an operating member (third operating means) different from the push button 45a and the lever member 45b may be arranged. As another operating member, for example, an operation of pushing in the back direction of the game machine or an operation of pulling in the direction of the front of the game machine is performed.

A cross key button 44 is installed on the right side of the operation unit 45. The cross key button 44 is composed of, for example, four push-type buttons. Specifically, the cross key button 44 is an upper button arranged on the game machine side, a right button arranged on the right side, a lower button arranged on the player side, and a left arranged on the left side when viewed from the player. It consists of buttons. By pressing the cross key button 44, the player can set the game environment and input the player's personal data into the game machine. Further, the player can switch the auto button function ON and OFF by pressing the upper button of the cross key button 44.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition to this, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown) that constitute the power system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed. The electronic devices will be described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 14).

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without a reference symbol), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, the game balls replenished from the replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the above-mentioned external terminal plate 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal plate 160, a game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island equipment of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Construction of board]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is centered on the effect unit 40 on the left side portion (first area, left-handed area) and the right side portion ( It is roughly divided into a second area, a right-handed area) and a lower part. Further, in the game area 8a, a start device 400, a start gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, etc. are located around the effect unit 40. Are distributed and installed. Of these, the start device 400 is located in the lower center of the left side portion of the game area 8a. The details of the start device 400 will be described later. Further, on the right side portion of the game area 8a, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of its flow down, enters the start device 400, enters (wins) the normal winning openings 22 and 25, or , The variable start winning device 28 at the time of opening operation, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter the start device 400 or the normal winning opening 22. The game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20, enters the normal winning opening 25, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation, or enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation. There is a possibility of entering the first variable winning device 30 or entering the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation.

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a hit manner), and accordingly, the variable start winning device 28 enters the right starting winning opening 28b. Enables a ball (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members 28a, and these opening / closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a solenoid (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 3, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the right starting winning opening 28b (the game ball enters the ball). There is no gap that can be created). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is activated, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position to the open position, respectively, and the opening width is expanded to the left and right to open the right start winning opening 28b. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the game ball can be entered, and the right starting winning opening 28b can be generated (variable starting winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28a also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the right starting winning opening 28b. Further, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b when opened). However, the game ball does not always enter the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b) at the time of the opening operation, and the winning balls occur randomly.

Further, the variable start winning device 28 is a predetermined condition that is difficult to be satisfied in the non-time shortened state (predetermined gaming state), and is more likely to be satisfied in the time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) than in the non-time shortened state. If the operating condition (the condition that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode and the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time) is not satisfied, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b. On the other hand, when the predetermined operating conditions are satisfied, the state shifts to the easy entry state, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b, rather than the difficult entry state. The variable start winning device 28 opens the short (opens for 0.1 seconds) when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode in the non-time shortened state, and stops and displays the normal symbol in the winning mode in the time shortened state. If this is the case, it will be opened for a long time (open for 1.0 to 6.0 seconds).

The first variable winning device 30 operates when the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, or when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game). , The first special winning opening 30b can be entered (special electric accessory, first special winning event generating means).

The first variable winning device 30 (attacker) is a device arranged below the variable starting winning device 28, and has one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example, to open / close the opening / closing member 30a. As shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the ball into the first large winning opening 30b. When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced by using the lower end edge portion as a hinge so as to fall forward, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the game balls can flow in, and the event of winning a prize in the first large winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the first winning opening 30b.

The second variable winning device 31 operates when a special condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit), and enables the ball to enter the second large winning opening 31b (). Special electric accessory, second special prize event generation means). The second variable winning device 31 may be operated when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged on the right side of the effect unit 40, and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 employs a type of device in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. It is difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not difficult, and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

[Specific area]
Further, a specific area 31x is provided inside the second variable winning device 31. The specific area 31x is an area in which the game ball is difficult to pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the specific area slide member 31c is in the open state when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. This is the area through which the game ball can pass when it is pulled into the inside of the board. The details of the second variable winning device 31 will be described later.

Further, although not particularly shown, the second variable winning device 31 (opening / closing member 31a) may be formed with a game ball rolling speed reducing portion that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball. The game ball rolling speed reduction portion makes the inclination of the opening / closing member 31a gentle, or forms alternately protruding protrusions on the opening / closing member 31a at a position where the game ball passes in a zigzag manner. It can be realized. As a result, many game balls can be entered into the second variable winning device 31 during the small hit game.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed inside the start device 400, and game balls that do not win in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, each start winning opening of the start device 400, normal winning openings 22, 25, variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b), first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b), second variable winning opening All the game balls driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that have entered the device 31 (second prize opening 31b, specific area), are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

4 and 5 are diagrams showing details of the second variable winning device 31.
In the second variable winning device 31, the second large winning opening 31b is arranged below the sliding opening / closing member 31a. The inside of the second prize opening 31b has a downward slope to the left, and a passage extends downward at the left end. A second count switch 85 is arranged in the passage extending downward, and the second count switch 85 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31.

Then, the passage extending downward is divided into two routes beyond that. One first passage 31d extends downward toward the specific region 31x, and the other second passage 31e extends downward toward the discharge hole 31y.
A slide member 31c for a specific area is arranged in the first passage 31d, and a specific area 31x is arranged downstream of the first passage 31d. A specific area switch (not shown) is arranged inside the specific area 31x.
On the other hand, no special member is arranged in the second passage 31e, and a discharge hole 31y is arranged downstream of the second passage 31e.

The slide member 31c for a specific area operates when a special condition is satisfied (after the lapse of the first time and before the lapse of the second time after the operation of the second variable winning device 31), and the slide member 31c for the specific area is moved to the specific area 31x. Allows the passage of game balls. The specific region slide member 31c slides along the front-rear direction of the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a specific region solenoid (not shown). For example, after the lapse of the first time, 0.2 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated, and after the lapse of the second time, 1.8 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated. After the lapse of time.

When the specific region solenoid is in the OFF state, the slide member 31c for the specific region blocks the first passage 31d, so that it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific region 31x. On the other hand, when the specific region solenoid is turned on, the specific region slide member 31c is pulled inside the board surface, so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific region 31x.

Next, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 4A, the slide-type opening / closing member 31a is pulled inside the board surface, and the game ball enters the second large winning opening 31b. In the illustrated example, four game balls are advancing toward the second winning opening 31b. Here, the first game ball is detected by the second count switch 85.

As shown in FIG. 4B, the first game ball has reached the slide member 31c for a specific area. The second and third game balls are advancing toward the second count switch 85. The fourth game ball is about to enter the second big winning opening 31b.

As shown in FIG. 4C, at this time, the slide member 31c for the specific area is not pulled inward (because it is not operating), so that the first game ball is the slide for the specific area. The traveling direction is changed to the right by the member 31c and heads toward the second passage 31e. In this case, the first game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

As shown in FIG. 5D, it is assumed that the slide member 31c for a specific area is pulled inside the board surface at this point (during operation). In this case, the second game ball passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific area and proceeds to the first passage 31d. Then, the second game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 5 (E), the third game ball also passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific region and proceeds to the first passage 31d. In this case, the third game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 5 (F), it is assumed that the operation of the specific area slide member 31c is completed at this point, and the specific area slide member 31c protrudes to the front side of the board surface. In this case, the fourth game ball is guided to the right by the slide member 31c for a specific area and proceeds to the second passage 31e. Then, the fourth game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

6 to 12 are views showing the details of the start device 400.
FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the start device 400.
As shown in FIG. 6, the start device 400 includes a base member 410, a cover member 420, a passage port 430, a right movable device 480, a left movable device 490, and the like.

The base member 410 is a member that serves as a base for the start device 400, and is attached to the game board unit 8 by a fastening member such as a screw.
The cover member 420 is a member attached to the front surface side of the base member 410, and various start winning openings and out openings are arranged inside the cover member 420.

The passage port 430 is arranged in the center of the upper part of the cover member 420, and is an entrance (where the game ball can pass) for the game ball to enter the start device 400.

The right movable device 480 is attached to the rear right side of the base member 410, and is a device for moving the right blade member 438 (see FIG. 7) of the start device 400.

The left movable device 490 is attached to the rear left side of the base member 410, and is a device for moving the left blade member 442 (see FIG. 7) of the start device 400.

7 and 8 are views showing the internal structure of the start device 400.
Here, FIG. 7 shows a state in which the blade members of the start device 400 (right blade member 438 and left blade member 442) are closed, and FIG. 8 shows a state in which the blade members of the start device 400 are open. Indicates the state.

As shown in FIG. 7, a guide passage 432 inclined in the lower right direction is formed below the passage port 430.
A one-hole crune member 434 is arranged at the lower right of the guide passage 432. The crune member 434 is a mortar-shaped member having a large opening on the upper side, and an opening through which one game ball can pass is formed on the bottom surface.
Below the crune member 434, a guide passage 436 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.

A right blade member 438 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 436.
At the lower left of the right blade member 438, a guide passage 440 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.
A left blade member 442 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 440.
At the lower left of the left blade member 442, a guide passage 444 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.

The start device right start winning opening 450, the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the start device left starting winning opening 454 are entry ports into which a game ball can enter.
The right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 can operate to affect the entry into the start device right start winning opening 450, the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the start device left starting winning opening 454 (openable / closable, movable). Possible) It is a movable body that can be moved.
Further, the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are arranged above (upstream) the start device right start winning opening 450 and the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the game ball is placed on the start device right starting winning opening 450 or the start device. It is a member that affects whether or not to enter (whether or not to pass) the middle start winning opening 452.

When the solenoid that operates the right blade member 438 is turned on, the right blade member 438 rises upward and shifts to the open state, and guides the game ball to the start device right start winning opening 450. On the other hand, when the solenoid that operates the right blade member 438 is turned off, the right blade member 438 maintains a closed state without getting up, and the game ball passes through the upper part of the right blade member 438 and enters the guide passage 440. Be guided.

Further, when the solenoid that operates the left blade member 442 is turned on, the left blade member 442 rises upward and shifts to the open state, and guides the game ball to the start winning opening 452 in the start device. On the other hand, when the solenoid that operates the left blade member 442 is turned off, the left blade member 442 keeps the closed state without getting up, and the game ball passes through the upper part of the left blade member 442 and enters the guide passage 444. Be guided.

In the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442, when the movable pin inserted near the center of the member is pushed upward, the movable pin moves along the guide groove arranged rearward, and the left side rotates. It rotates about the axis and shifts to the open state (see FIG. 8).

Below the right blade member 438, a start device right start winning opening 450 is arranged. The start device right start winning opening 450 is an opportunity generation area in which a game ball that has entered the passing opening 430 can enter (pass through) and can generate a lottery opportunity (predetermined opportunity) for the first special symbol lottery. ..

Below the left blade member 442, a start winning opening 452 in the start device is arranged. The start winning opening 452 in the start device is an opportunity generation area in which a game ball that has entered the passing opening 430 can enter (pass) and can generate a lottery opportunity (predetermined opportunity) for the first special symbol lottery. ..

At the lower left of the guide passage 444, a start device left start winning opening 454 is arranged. The start device left start winning opening 454 is an opportunity generation area in which a game ball that has entered the passing opening 430 can enter (pass) and can generate a lottery trigger (predetermined trigger) for a normal symbol lottery.

On the right side of the start device right start winning opening 450, a guide passage 462 inclined in the lower right direction is formed.
An out port 32 is arranged at the lower right of the guide passage 462. On the right side of the out port 32, a guide passage 460 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.

On the left side of the start device right start winning opening 450, a guide passage 464 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.
An out port 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 464.

On the right side of the start winning opening 452 in the start device, a guide passage 466 inclined in the lower right direction is formed.
On the left side of the start winning opening 452 in the start device, a guide passage 468 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.
An out port 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 468.

On the right side of the start device left start winning opening 454, a guide passage 470 inclined in the lower right direction is formed.
On the left side of the start device left start winning opening 454, a guide passage 472 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.
An out port 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 472. On the left side of the out port 32, a guide passage 474 inclined in the lower right direction is formed.

The start device illumination board 476 is arranged below the start device right start winning opening 450, the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the start device left starting winning opening 454.
Three lamps (LEDs) 478 are arranged on the start device illumination board 476, and when a game ball enters each start winning opening, the corresponding lamps are turned on.

Next, the flow of the game ball inside the start device 400 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 9, the game ball that has entered the passage port 430 is guided to the right blade member 438 via the crune member 434.
Then, when the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are closed, the game ball passes over the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442, and finally, the start device left start winning opening 454. Enter the ball.

Since the start device left start winning opening switch is arranged in the start device left starting winning opening 454, the entry of the game ball is detected by the start device left starting winning opening switch.

On the other hand, even when the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is open, the flow of the game ball is the same as when the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is closed until the middle.
That is, as shown in FIG. 10, the game ball that has entered the passage port 430 is guided to the right blade member 438 via the crune member 434.

Then, when the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is open, the game ball falls at the position of the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442, and finally, the start device right start winning opening 450. Alternatively, the ball enters the start winning opening 452 in the start device.

Since the start device right start winning opening switch is arranged in the start device right starting winning opening 450, the entry of the game ball is detected by the starting device right starting winning opening switch.
Further, since the start device middle start winning opening switch is arranged in the start device middle start winning opening 452, the entry of the game ball is detected by the start device middle start winning opening switch.

Here, when the game ball enters the passage port 430 of the start device 400, the ball always enters any of the start device right start winning opening 450, the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the start device left starting winning opening 454. This is not the case, and in some cases, the ball may enter the out port 32. Further, not only the game ball that has entered the passage port 430 of the start device 400 but also the game ball that has not entered the passage port 430 of the start device 400 may enter the out port 32 from the side surface side. ..
Although the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are described in the example of simultaneously shifting to the open state, it is also possible not to shift to the open state at the same time.

11 and 12 are side views of the start device 400.
Here, FIG. 11 shows a state in which the blade member (for example, the right blade member 438 in FIG. 10) is closed, and FIG. 12 shows a state in which the blade member is open.

As described above, the right movable device 480 is attached to the rear right side of the base member 410 and is a device for moving the right blade member 438 of the start device 400.

Further, the right movable device 480 includes a start device right solenoid 481, a coil member 482, a flapper member 483, an arm member 484, a hook member 485, a spring member 486, and the like. The hook member 485 may be configured as a part of the arm member 484 (the hook member 485 and the arm member 484 may be the same component).

When the start device right solenoid 481 is energized by the main control device, the coil member 482 is excited and the plate-shaped flapper member 483 is attracted to the coil member 482.
The flapper member 483 and the arm member 484 are connected to each other, and when the flapper member 483 moves upward, the arm member 484 also moves upward. Further, an arc-shaped hook member 485 is connected to the tip of the arm member 484. Therefore, as the flapper member 483 and the arm member 484 move, the hook member 485 also moves upward (see FIG. 12).

Then, when the hook member 485 moves upward, the hook member 485 pushes up the movable pin 487 inserted in the right blade member 438, and the right blade member 438 shifts from the closed state to the open state (see FIG. 10). In this case, the coil member 482 and the flapper member 483 are prevented from coming into contact with each other by a stopper (not shown) (see FIG. 12).

Further, when the start device right solenoid 481 is not energized, the flapper member 483 is arranged at a position away from the coil member 482 by the spring member 486 (or the weight of the spring member 486 and the flapper member 483). (See FIG. 11).
Although the right movable device 480 has been described here, the same configuration is adopted for the left movable device 490.

[Characteristics of start device]
There are many prize-winning device units that are provided with an opening / closing member to limit winning in a specific winning area as a conventional technique, but as in the present embodiment, the starting winning opening is provided. There is no configuration in which the opening / closing member constantly opens / closes from the time the power is turned on, and the opening / closing stabilizes the starting winning rate.

The start device 400 randomly changes various symbols by allocating the game ball that has entered the passing port 430 into the start winning opening of the special symbol and the starting winning opening (winning opening, operating opening) of the normal symbol. It has a function.

Hereinafter, the details of the flow of the game ball in the start device 400 will be described.
(1) A passing port 430 is set at the upper part of the start device 400, and the game ball that enters from there heads toward the crune member 434 in one hole, and the time until it is discharged from the crune member 434 is irregular. give. As a result, it is possible to avoid the rattling due to vibration such as slamming. It is also possible to attach a vibration sensor, a magnet sensor, and a radio wave sensor to the start device 400 to strengthen measures against various types of goto. The crune member 434 is attached to the start device 400 with some play, and can absorb an external impact (such as pounding) by the play, so that the influence of vibration can be avoided.

(2) The game ball discharged from the crune member 434 is guided to a slope-shaped guide passage, and depends on the open / closed state of the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442, which are arranged in the middle of the guide passage and open and close constantly. The sphere path changes as follows.

(A) When the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is open, the game ball falls from the slope and heads toward the start winning opening of the special symbol held below.
(B) When the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is closed, the game ball passes over the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442. By mounting the start device 400 with two blade members, the start device 400 is given two chances to win a prize in the start winning opening of the special symbol.

(3) The game ball not picked up by the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 finally heads for the start winning opening of the normal symbol (the normal symbol operating port in which the normal symbol fluctuates).

Further, the start device 400 has the following features.
Out ports are arranged on the left and right of the start winning opening of the special symbol and the starting winning opening of the normal symbol, and the out openings at the bottom of the board surface in general models are deleted.
Since the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are constantly movable, the actuator of the start device 400 is equipped with a flapper type solenoid instead of the generally used push-pull type solenoid to prevent deterioration due to wear. I'm preventing it.

In addition, since the player has to visually follow how the game balls that have entered the start device 400 are distributed, a special symbol start winning opening is used to visually inform the player of this. In addition, a lamp (LED) is placed at the bottom of the starting winning opening of the normal symbol to have a function to illuminate at the winning timing.

Then, by adopting the start device 400 having such a configuration, the following effects can be exhibited.
(1) By mounting the crune member 434, the timing of the game ball entering the start device 400 toward the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442, which is opened and closed, is given irregularity to the player. The movement of the game ball enhances the feeling of exhilaration, and the game ball is launched at the timing of opening the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442, which makes it possible to take measures against so-called capture strikes.

(2) By mounting the out port on the start device 400, the area of the out port arranged at the lower part of the board surface can be applied to the start device 400, and the start device 400 and the out port can be integrated to make the start device 400 compact. It is possible to make effective use of the lower part of the board.

(3) By adopting a flapper type solenoid, it is possible to prevent wear of the solenoid itself and ensure durability that can withstand constant movement.

(4) By arranging a lamp (LED) below the starting winning opening of the special symbol and the starting winning opening of the normal symbol and illuminating it at the winning timing, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the prize has been won.

FIG. 13 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a).
The game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 (normal symbol display means) and a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a at a lower right position in the window 4a, and a first special symbol display device 34 (first special symbol display device 34). 1 symbol display means), a second special symbol display device 35 (second symbol display means), a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33 alternately lights three lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the ordinary symbol by turning on or off the lamps. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The individual is displayed, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

When the game ball passes through the start gate 20 or when the game ball enters the start device left start winning opening 454, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a causes a passage that triggers an operation lottery each time. In the sense of remembering that, it changes to the display mode after increasing one by one (up to 4), and the display mode after decreasing by one each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts with the passage. It changes to. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display, for example, a floating state and a stopped state of the special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means, first). Symbol display means, second symbol display means). In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a are each 0 to 4 depending on the display mode composed of, for example, a combination of turning off or lighting the two lamps (LEDs) and blinking. (Memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking of one lamp, and three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. It displays 4 pieces, and so on.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is increased by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the start device right start winning opening 450 or the start device middle starting winning opening 452, it is memorized that the entry has occurred. The display mode changes to the later display mode (up to 4), and each time the special symbol starts to change with the ball entering, the display mode changes to the display mode after the reduction by one. In addition, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is one by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b), the occurrence of the winning ball is memorized. It changes to the display mode after the increase (up to 4), and changes to the display mode after the decrease by one each time the change of the special symbol is started triggered by the entry of the ball. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of stored symbols is 0), the first special symbol (first symbol) is in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed). , The display mode does not change even if the game ball enters the start device right start winning opening 450 or the start device starting winning opening 452. Further, when the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is not lit (the number of stored symbols is 0), the variable start winning device is in a state where the second special symbol (second symbol) can already start fluctuating (when the stop is displayed). Even if the game ball enters 28 (right start winning opening 28b), the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (maximum of 4) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation memory lamps 34a and 35a is that of the incoming ball for which the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started to change. It represents the number of times.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, six LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation display lamp 38f, respectively. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Other configurations of the game board: see Fig. 3]
The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. A liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed in the upper part of the inside of the effect unit 40, and the liquid crystal display 42 is provided with an effect symbol (this symbol) corresponding to a special symbol or a fourth symbol. First, various production images are displayed. As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface (the design of the cell board (not shown)) and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d is connected to the lower rolling stage 40e through the back side of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll freely in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k flows into the passage port 430 of the start device 400 directly below the ball release path 40e. It will be easier.

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) (not shown) is attached to the inside of the upper center of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f (for example, a heart-shaped decoration) for effect. The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By such an effect using the movable body 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

A 7-segment display device 200 is arranged below the liquid crystal display 42. Three 7-segment LEDs are arranged on the 7-segment display device 200. The 7-segment display device 200 fluctuates and displays the 7-segment effect symbol while the special symbol fluctuates, and displays the effect during the big hit game.

Further, a storage display device 300 is arranged at the lower right of the 7-segment display device 200. The storage display device 300 can execute an effect related to memory by emitting light (lighting, turning off, etc.) of the built-in LED.

The storage display device 300 is provided with a first special symbol storage display area M1, a second special symbol storage display area M2, the storage display area X1, and an effect display area X2.
Four white LEDs are arranged in the first special symbol storage display area M1, and the number of LEDs lit corresponds to the number of storages of the first special symbol (the number of displays of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a). There is.
Four white LEDs are arranged in the second special symbol storage display area M2, and the number of LEDs lit corresponds to the number of storages of the second special symbol (the number of displays of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a). There is.

One full-color LED is arranged in the storage display area X1, and the LED is lit, indicating that the special symbol is changing.
One or a plurality of full-color LEDs are arranged in the effect display area X2, and it is shown that the degree of expectation of winning the special symbol lottery increases depending on the lighting color of the LEDs. Since the effect display area X2 is lit in the same color as the internally drawn LED color (holding color), it is possible to give an easy-to-understand notification to the player.

When the color change effect of the memory is executed, the lighting color of the target LED is changed, but in the present embodiment, the first special symbol storage display area M1 and the second special symbol storage display area M2 are white. The LED is arranged. Therefore, the color change effect cannot be executed in the first special symbol storage display area M1 and the second special symbol storage display area M2. Therefore, when the color change effect of the memory is executed, the lighting color of the effect display area X2 is changed to substitute for the color change effect. However, in this case, since it is difficult to know which memory is the target, it is preferable to blink the target LED.
A full-color LED may be arranged in the first special symbol storage display area M1 and the second special symbol storage display area M2 to execute the color change effect.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted, and the main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76 are integrated. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Of these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for a big hit determination of a special symbol lottery or a hit determination of a normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main control device 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a counter / timer circuit (CTC), which are circuits together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or inner layer portion).

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of the game ball. Further, the start device left start winning opening 454 is provided with a start device left starting winning opening switch 78a for detecting the entry of a game ball.
Further, the game board unit 8 starts corresponding to the start device middle start winning opening 452, the start device right starting winning opening 450, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. The in-device start winning opening switch 80, the starting device right starting winning opening switch 81, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, and the second count switch 85 are provided.
The start device middle start winning opening switch 80, the start device right starting winning opening switch 81, and the right starting winning opening switch 82 are the start device middle starting winning opening 452, the starting device middle starting winning opening 452, and the variable starting winning device 28 (right), respectively. This is for detecting the winning of a game ball into the starting winning opening 28b). Further, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b) and counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second variable winning device 31 (the second major winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof.

In addition, a specific area switch 83 is provided corresponding to the specific area 31x. A specific area switch 83 is provided at a position corresponding to the specific area 31x inside the second special winning opening 31b, and the specific area switch 83 detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball into the ordinary winning openings 22 and 25. Here, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used for all the ordinary winning opening 22 and 25 is given as an example. For example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the winning opening on the left side is used. The switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the normal winning openings 22 and 25 located on the left side of the board, and the right winning opening switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the ordinary winning openings 25 located on the right side of the board. May be.

In any case, the winning detection signal and the passing detection signal of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the gate switch 78, the start device left start winning opening switch 78a, the specific area switch 83, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the winning opening switch 86 are used. The winning detection signal and the passing detection signal are transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal. ..

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and the integrated display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 by relaying the panel relay terminal board 87.

Further, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, a normal electric accessory solenoid 88, and a first large winning opening solenoid corresponding to the specific area 31x, respectively. 90, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 and the specific area solenoid 99 are provided. Further, in the game board unit 8, the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device correspond to the start device right start winning opening 450 (right movable device 480) and the start device middle start winning opening 452 (left movable device 490), respectively. A left solenoid 491 is provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99, 481, 491 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and are the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. , The specific area 31x, the start device right start winning opening 450 and the start device middle start winning opening 452 are opened and closed. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99, 481, 491 are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and control signals are transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, the glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and the plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (means for granting special benefits). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and the payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When each prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the above-mentioned flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with the game balls, the more paid out game balls are released. As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above. Among them, the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in 1 minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Will be sent to. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118, and when the above CR unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120, the same firing is performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 contains a frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the CR unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not loaded into the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the loaded valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which the effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 or a RAM 130 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position covered by the back cover unit 178.

Further, the effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect based on the command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72, gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134, and emits various lamps 46 to 52 and the board lamp 53. The processing is performed so that the speakers 54, 55, 56 actually output sound effects, voices, and the like.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). The serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of.

The lamp drive circuit 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and the lamp drive circuit 132 switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps including LEDs. ), And manage the operation such as light emission and blinking. In addition to the above-mentioned glass frame top lamp 46 and glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a board surface lamp 53 for decoration and production installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built in the above-mentioned effect unit, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Although an example in which the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame illumination substrate 136 is given here, the saucer illumination substrate is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the glass frame decoration lamp 52 is attached to the saucer illumination. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp drive circuit 132 via a substrate.

Further, the acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator having a built-in sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown), and the acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame and the outer frame speaker 56. To output sound.

In the present embodiment, the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 and various lamps 46. It is applied to ~ 52 and speakers 54, 55, 56. Further, the push button 45a and the lever member 45b are connected to the glass frame illuminated substrate 136, and when the player operates the push button 45a or the lever member 45b, the contact signal is sent to the glass frame illuminated substrate 136. Is input to the effect control device 124 through. Furthermore, the above-mentioned cross key button 44 is connected to the glass frame illuminated substrate 136, and when the player operates the cross key button 44, the contact signal is transmitted through the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 to the effect control device 124. Is entered in. Here, an example in which the push button 45a, the lever member 45b, and the cross key button 44 are connected to the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 is given, but when the above-mentioned saucer illuminated substrate is installed, the push button 45a and the lever member are given. The 45b and the cross key button 44 may be connected to the saucer illumination board. In addition, a panel illumination board 138 is installed on the game board unit 8, and a movable motor 57 is connected to the panel illumination board 138 in addition to the board lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively. The movable motor 57 may be a solenoid.

Further, a button motor 45d is connected to the glass frame illuminated substrate 136.
The button motor 45d is a stepping motor that raises and lowers the push button 45a, and is driven by an operation unit control device (not shown) that controls the operation unit 45. The operation unit control device drives the button motor 45d based on the drive signal transmitted from the effect control device 124 to bring the push button 45a into either a normal state (initial position) or a protruding state (maximum movable position). It can be displaced to the crab.

Further, a 7-segment display device 200 and a storage display device 300 are connected to the effect control device 124. The 7-segment display device 200 and the storage display device 300 are driven by a control device (driver, IC) (not shown) that controls these devices. The effect control device 124 (effect control CPU 126) controls the 7-segment display device 200 and the storage display device 300 through a control device (not shown).

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a display processor VDP152 is mounted, together with a display control CPU 146 which is a general-purpose central processing unit. Of these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 148 and RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). Further, the VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 are integrated together with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of its storage area as a frame buffer.

A basic program related to the control of the effect is stored in the ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126, and the effect control CPU 126 executes the control of the effect according to this program. The control of the effect includes the control of the effect using various lamps 46 to 53 and the speakers 54, 55, 56 as described above, and the control of the effect by displaying the image using the liquid crystal display 42. .. The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, an effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 receiving this transmits a concrete image for effect based on the basic information. Control the display.

The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Upon receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads out necessary image data from the image ROM 154, and transfers the necessary image data to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in the frame buffer, and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is individually based on the image data buffered here. Drive to.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The above-mentioned external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to the outside from. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal plate 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is given as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal plate 160.

The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or by clearing the backup information. It is a process for. Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

15 and 16 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector interrupt mode (mode 2), and modifies the default RST interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, after that, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the designated interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a reset standby process here. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checking the main power cutoff detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power supply disconnection detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power supply cutoff detection signal is input from, for example, a power supply monitoring IC which is a peripheral device. Then, if the input of the main power supply cutoff detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. Thereby, for example, it is possible to protect the system when the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S105: Further, the mask register is initially set in order to set the main control CPU 72 and the interrupt mask. Specifically, the value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch saved earlier, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is then executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup valid determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power cutoff process and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all the work areas (user work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup valid determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Further, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurs.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a return command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, an operation memory number increase effect command, an operation memory number decrease effect command, and a number of times cut) to the effect control device 124. Counter command, special game status specification command, etc.) are sent. In response to this, the effect control device 124 receives the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the acoustic output content, and various lamps) that were being executed when the power was cut off last time. The light emitting state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes the state return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state (for example, the display mode of the special symbol, the internal probability state, etc.) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs the initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command required for the effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of the prize ball to the payout control device 92.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes the CTC initial setting process and performs the initial setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector register and sets the interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the backed up program address of the PC register.

When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 16 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes a power failure occurrence check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power supply cutoff detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power supply cutoff (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, when the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the grand prize opening solenoid 90, etc., the entire work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid judgment flag and the thumb check buffer. Back up the contents of and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup valid determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops the process (NOP). On the other hand, if the power cutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU is made to execute such a process when a power failure occurs as an non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments the random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers other than the jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol (for example, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc.) Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 18), and the initial values of the loop counter (all) are updated every time the random number value makes one cycle in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S120 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 18), so that there is duplication (conflict) with this. ) To prevent. As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is even faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number.

Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed with the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 18). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of the procedure for the power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is continuously output, for example.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port, and confirms whether or not the main power supply disconnection detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, the main power supply disconnection detection switch is mounted on, for example, the main control device 70, and the main power supply disconnection detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162 and determines the voltage level. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, a main power failure detection signal is output. The main power supply disconnection detection switch may be built in the power supply control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power supply cutoff detection signal has not been output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-counter value set in the previous step S130 is subtracted by, for example, 1, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not 0 (No) at this point, the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the test signal terminal and the output port buffer corresponding to the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the grand prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters the standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (not shown), so that the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power supply is cut off. Retained without doing. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the main power supply is cut off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 15).

[Interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)]
Next, the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the interrupt management process. The main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L pairs) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described above.

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes the input process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input / output (I / O) ports 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the start device left start winning opening switch 78a, the starting device middle starting winning opening switch 80, the starting device right starting winning opening switch 81, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first It reads the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from the 1-count switch 84, the 2nd count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86, and the specific area switch 83.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the gate switch 78, the start device left start winning opening switch 78a, the start device middle start winning opening switch 80, the start device right starting winning opening switch 81, and the right starting winning opening. The event that occurred during the game is determined based on the passage detection signals from the mouth switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the specific area switch 83, and another event is determined according to the event that has occurred. Execute the process. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using a further flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the start device middle start winning opening switch 80 or the starting device right starting winning opening switch 81, the main control CPU 72 draws an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery trigger, first lottery trigger, first special symbol lottery lottery trigger) has occurred.
Further, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the right start winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 triggers an internal lottery corresponding to the second special symbol (lottery trigger, second lottery trigger, second special symbol). It is determined that an event that triggers the lottery) has occurred.
Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, or when the winning detection signal (ON) is input from the start device left start winning opening switch 78a, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the normal symbol. It is determined that an event that triggers the lottery has occurred.

When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each event. Regarding the processing executed when the winning detection signal is input from the start device middle start winning opening switch 80, the starting device right starting winning opening switch 81, or the right starting winning opening switch 82, another flowchart is used. It will be described later.

Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among them, in the special symbol game processing (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the first special symbol display device 34 and the first. 2 The variable display and the stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special symbol game processing will be described later using a further flowchart.

Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (ordinary symbol lottery execution means). When the random value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 fluctuates the normal symbol to display the stop display of the normal symbol in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is activated by excitation (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in an out-of-order manner after the fluctuation display.

Further, in the present embodiment, by turning on and off the three LEDs of the normal symbol display device 33 in order, a variable display of the normal symbol is performed, and among the upper and lower three LEDs, for example, the upper LED is turned on. It is possible to display the stop at the time of non-winning and to display the stop at the time of winning with either of the two LEDs below turned on. Regarding which of the two LEDs below is to be turned on, the main control CPU 72 determines which of the two LEDs is to be turned on, based on the hit stop symbol number determined by the hit lottery, and the stop symbol (hit symbol) by the normal symbol display device 33. The display mode of is determined.

For example, when the winning probability of a normal symbol is set to about 1/1 in the non-time shortened state, the distribution ratio between the winning symbol 1 and the winning symbol 2 existing in two types is "1300: 1". That is, the probability of corresponding to the winning symbol 1 as the winning symbol of the ordinary symbol is "1299/1300", and the probability of corresponding to the winning symbol 2 of the ordinary symbol as the winning symbol is "1/1300". Then, when the hit symbol 1 is applicable, the variable start winning device 28 is short-opened (opened for 0.1 seconds), so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable start winning device 28. On the other hand, when the winning symbol 2 is applicable, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time (opened for 6.0 seconds), so that there is a chance that the variable starting winning device 28 can enter the game ball even in the non-time shortened state. Occurs.

By setting the distribution rate of the winning symbol in this way, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol fluctuates 1300 times, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time at a rate of about once. In the time-reduced state, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time regardless of whether it corresponds to the hit symbol 1 or the hit symbol 2. In this case, the opening pattern can be different between the hit symbol 1 and the hit symbol 2. Further, when the variable start winning device 28 is long-opened in the non-time shortened state, the main control CPU 72 transmits a variable start winning device long open start command to the effect control device 124.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. In this process, the number of prize balls is instructed to the payout control device 92 based on the prize detection signals input from the various switches 78a, 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203). Outputs the prize ball instruction command. The number of prize balls can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the game. For example, the number of prize balls of the starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four, the number of winning balls of the starting winning opening corresponding to the normal symbol is one, and the first large winning opening The number of prize balls in the second major winning opening is 15, and the number of prize balls in the normal winning opening is four. Information on the number of prize balls can also be transmitted to the effect control device 124 as a prize ball content command.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls to be obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are stipulated. If the conditions are met, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S207a: The main control CPU 72 executes the solenoid management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the operations of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491 that are always movable from the time the power is turned on. Details will be described later in FIG. 45.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, start port) to the hall computer (external device) of the amusement park through the external terminal plate 160. Information etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer.

In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a vessel or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time. Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, time shortening function operating). And store these in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. It controls the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the special symbol game processing (step S205) and the normal symbol game processing (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc.) is performed.

Step S211: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 port outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). Further, the main control CPU 72 is a drive signal and a test signal of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the specific area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer. Etc. and output to the port.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command required for effect control) in the command buffer, and if there is an untransmitted command, the command to be output is output. Output to port.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in the CTC interrupt this time.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 are executed as timer interrupt processes is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores the value (01H) for specifying the interrupt end in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After that, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 18). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the start device middle start winning opening switch 80 or the starting device right starting winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the first special symbol. To do. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the right-starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game (during the small hit game). On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol or the start device left start winning opening switch 78a. When the input of the detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S24. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S24: The main control CPU 72 executes the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol operation memories is less than the upper limit (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit, it is necessary for the normal symbol lottery. Various random number values (ordinary random numbers per symbol, etc.) are acquired. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the number of normal symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired various random number values in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the passage detection signal is input from the specific area switch 83 corresponding to the specific area 31x in the second special winning opening 31b. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 to execute a process of turning on the specific area reserve flag. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 18).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 19). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section contains a jackpot determined random number and a jackpot symbol. Random numbers can be stored one by one as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol reaches the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 19). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random numbers related to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). Means, lottery element acquisition means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (1st lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fourth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: When the case is not during the jackpot (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the special symbol lottery and the fluctuation time are preliminarily (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively. This is for determining the content of the production (so-called "look-ahead"). In this process, the result of the pre-determination of the first special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command (look-ahead information).

Step S38: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower bytes of the special figure destination determination effect command (information on whether or not the command is correct or information on the fluctuation time) are set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper bytes are combined with the lower bytes here. By doing so, for example, a command with a length of one word will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the number of working memories this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the number of working memories "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. In this process, the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 ( Memory number notification means).

When the above procedure is completed or the number of first special symbol operation memories has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 19).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 19). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 19). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 20), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element). Acquisition means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (2nd lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the jackpot (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judging. In this process, the result of the preliminary determination of the second special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command.

Step S47: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, in this case as well, the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46). Therefore, here, for example, one word length is obtained by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte. Command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". it can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, regarding the second special symbol, a special figure destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect command, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like are transmitted to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means). When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 19).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 20, step S46 in FIG. 21) (preliminary determination). Means, look-ahead processing execution means). As described above, this process performs the first special symbol (when the ball enters the start device middle start winning opening 452 or the start device right start winning opening 450) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). ) Is executed for each. Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process related to the first special symbol or the process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random number value. The random number to be loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 20) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 21). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, advance determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command (look-ahead information) for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-reach variation (non-reduction variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if it exists. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not operating (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of small hit, in the same manner as the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 20) or second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 21). On the other hand, in the determination in step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 20) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 21). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and it is determined from the result which winning symbol corresponds to. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S78.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, the special symbol destination judgment value is set to "00H" when it corresponds to "a symbol that does not shift to the time reduction state", and "01H" when it corresponds to "a symbol that shifts to the time reduction state". .. In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 20) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 21).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 18) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game processing. The special symbol game process includes execution selection process (step S1000), special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), special symbol change process (step S3000), special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and variable winning device management process. (Step S5000) is a configuration including a group of subroutines (program modules). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variation display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is changing. If the processing is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the processing during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU performs each process as a whole, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol.

Step S4000: In the process during special symbol stop display, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and a stop display of a special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit or small hit mode (a mode other than the non-winning mode) in the previous special symbol stop display processing. The big hit game or the small hit game is started according to the mode in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Big hit game]
For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a three-round jackpot, a jackpot game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the first large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, for 29 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 3 times). The first variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable prize device 30, the player is given an opportunity to collectively obtain a large number of prize balls (special game execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a big hit is referred to as "round", and if the number of continuous operations is three in total, these may be collectively referred to as "three rounds". In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the three-round jackpot. As the type of jackpot, not only the jackpot of 3 rounds but also the jackpot of other rounds may be provided.

Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the opening / closing of the first variable winning device 30 for one round. The value of the round count counter is incremented by 1 each time the operation is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command indicating the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 18). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) only for that round.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (time shortened state) after the jackpot game is completed based on the game status flag (time reduction function operation flag) (time reduction state transition means). In the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the lottery probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is set from the normal probability (low probability) to the high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the variable start prize is won. The opening time of the device 28 is extended and the number of times of opening is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed). It should be noted that a game machine including elements of a so-called type 2 game machine (for example, a type 1 type 2 type mixer or a type 2 game machine, that is, a big hit game is executed by passing a game ball through a specific area during a small hit game. In the game machine), the winning probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbol may not be shifted to the high probability state. In this case, the winning probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is a fixed probability (for example, approximately 1/1) regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is activated, and the open pattern of the variable start winning device 28 makes it easy to win. Difficulty can be adjusted.

The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state (first state) and a time reduction state (second state) different from the normal gaming state.
By executing such a process, when the transition condition to the time reduction state is satisfied (when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode), the main control CPU 72 is displayed. It is possible to shift from the normal gaming state (first state) to the time saving state (second state) (state transition means).

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When the small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game execution means). For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, a small hit game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 operates for a certain period of time (for example, for 1.8 seconds or until 10 prizes are counted) for a preset number of operations (for example, once or for a plurality of times). It is excited, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (operation of a special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to obtain a certain amount of prize balls (special game execution means).

Further, in the variable winning device management process during the small hit game, the specific region solenoid 99 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) for a preset number of operations (for example, once), thereby for the specific region. The slide member 31c opens and closes in a fixed pattern. By passing the game ball through the specific area 31x during this period, the player is given an opportunity to start the big hit game. That is, whether or not the big hit game is started in the variable winning device management process is determined depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game. In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the small hit, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, the big hit game according to the winning type is started.

Further, even if the small hit game ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 31x, the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state" is not given (hence). It is not a prerequisite for.) If a small hit is won in the "time reduction state", the "time reduction state" may end after the small hit game ends.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, "2 round jackpot", "3 round jackpot 1, 2", "4 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot", and "10 round jackpot" are provided as a plurality of winning types. "2 round jackpot" and "3 round jackpot 1 and 2" are started when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of jackpot, while "4 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot" and "10 round jackpot" are started. Is started when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit and the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game. Of the "4 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot" and "10 round jackpot", the second variable winning device 31 operates in the first round, and the first variable winning device 30 operates in the remaining rounds.

The above-mentioned winning types correspond to the types of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that are stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "3 round jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "1st winning symbol", "3 round jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "2nd winning symbol", and "2 round jackpot" corresponds to "3rd winning symbol". Corresponds to the big hit of "design". In addition, "10 round big hit" corresponds to the small hit of "4th winning symbol" (big hit when passing the specific area 31x), and "7 round big hit" corresponds to the small hit of "5th winning symbol" (passing the specific area 31x). The "4 round big hit" corresponds to the small hit of the "6th winning symbol" (the big hit when passing through the specific area 31x). Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[1st winning symbol]
In the process during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "first winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the third round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "first winning symbol" is a big hit game in which three rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In addition, when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round, the first large winning opening 30b is closed without waiting for the lapse of the longest opening time (hereinafter, the same applies). .. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 6 times).

[2nd winning symbol]
In the process during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "second winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the third round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "second winning symbol" is a big hit game in which three rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 100 times).

[Third winning design]
When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "third winning symbol" in the processing during the special symbol stop display, the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the second round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "third winning symbol" is a big hit game in which two rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 100 times).

[4th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fourth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "fourth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player nine rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 6 times).

[5th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fifth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the seventh round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "fifth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player six rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 6 times).

[6th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "sixth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the fourth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "sixth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player three rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 6 times).

As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of which of the winning symbols is applicable, the game shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game ends. In addition, it may be possible to shift to the "time reduction state" only for a part of the winning symbols among the plurality of winning symbols.

In this way, a small hit is won by an internal lottery, and when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game is executed, and after the big hit game is completed, the time is shortened according to the type of the winning symbol. The gaming machine is a so-called one-kind two-kind mixed type gaming machine.

In this way, when the game ball is launched into the left-handed area (first area) and corresponds to a big hit (predetermined first winning), the main control CPU 72 enables the big hit game (first game) to be executed (1st game). First game execution means).

Further, when the game ball is launched into the right-handed area (second area) and corresponds to a small hit (predetermined second winning), the main control CPU 72 may lead to a small hit game (second). (Game) can be executed (second game execution means).

Further, when the game ball is fired in the left-handed area (first area) and the winning symbol 2 is won in the normal symbol lottery (predetermined third winning), the main control CPU 72 wins the small hit (predetermined third winning). The open game (third game) of the variable start winning device 28, which may lead to (2 winning), can be executed (third game execution means).

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demo effect command. The demo effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 18). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process (second lottery priority execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers, etc.) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol (so-called priority). digestion). At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections (only the first special symbol is applicable), the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then erases (consumes) the remaining random numbers by 1. Move (shift) to the previous section one by one. The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads out the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol. It should be noted that a control in which random numbers are simply read out in the order in which they are stored may be adopted without setting such a priority for each special symbol (so-called forward digestion). Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol that shifts the random number) stored in the RAM 76. The latter value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18), the display mode of the number of stored numbers by the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is changed (decreased by 1). .. After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned special symbol storage area shift processing. In the previous special symbol change preprocessing, when the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than "0" (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 24), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the operation memory corresponding to the second special symbol remains. This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the second special symbol operation storage number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 1 or more (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates a second special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 0 (step S2210: No), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. To do. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 with respect to the target special symbol specified in either step S2212 or step S2214. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the "working memory number at the start of fluctuation" may be set after adding the values of the working memory counters.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special symbol to be shifted the storage area this time is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word length command, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the reduction, with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ”) Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logically) with an additional value (for example,“ 10H ”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption”. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The above-mentioned preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: When the target of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation memory number reduction effect command set in step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 24).

[See Fig. 24: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution). means). If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

When the above jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (first). Lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The "small hit" here is something other than non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the above-mentioned "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. The "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating only the second variable winning device 31 (the condition for operating the condition device is not satisfied). Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the "small hit", it is positioned to develop into a "big hit" (the condition for operating the condition device is satisfied). In any case, if the read random number value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random number value.

In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the big hit is set to 1/319, and the winning of the small hit is not set. Further, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the big hit is set to 1/319, and the probability of winning the small hit is set to 1/6. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit. In order to satisfy these jackpot winning probabilities and small hit winning probabilities, the jackpot value range and the small hit value range are set by the main control CPU 72 and compared with the read random number values.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 18).

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be set, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to a variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) (not shown), and executes a variation pattern determination process at the time of disconnection (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display. Fluctuation patterns include various fluctuation patterns such as normal fluctuation (non-reach fluctuation), reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc. (the same applies to large hits and small hits). It should be noted that the information regarding the fluctuation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a fluctuation pattern command including the information as to whether or not it is a special fluctuation (the same applies to the case of a big hit or the time of a small hit). ).

Here, since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is in the above-mentioned "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and the current state is "time reduction". Check if it is in "state". Further, even if it is not in the "time reduction state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the fluctuation for executing the reach effect is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of the variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of the variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of the variable display). 2 pieces → about 5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display 3 pieces → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

The fluctuation pattern includes various fluctuation patterns such as a non-reach fluctuation pattern, a reach fluctuation pattern, a super reach fluctuation pattern, and the like (the same applies to a large hit and a small hit). The fluctuation pattern selection table may have different table contents according to the number of working memories at the start of fluctuations, may be common table contents regardless of the number of working memories at the start of fluctuations, and may be a table according to the winning type at the time of winning. It may be the content.

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 29.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation), whereas the "reach fluctuation" The "pattern" corresponds to a longer fluctuation time (for example, about 30.0 seconds to 150.0 seconds).

The fluctuation pattern may be a fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous notice effect (pseudo-ream) is executed. The pseudo continuous advance notice effect is an effect in which the effect symbol changes once or a plurality of times in a pseudo manner during one change of the special symbol.

Here, the pseudo 1 variation (pseudo 1: 1st pseudo variation) is a variation in which the pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed once, and the pseudo 2 variation (pseudo 2: 2nd pseudo variation). (Pseudo-variation) is a variation in which the pseudo-variation of the effect symbol is executed twice. Further, the pseudo 3 variation (pseudo 3: 3rd pseudo variation) is a variation in which the pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed 3 times, and the pseudo 4 variation (pseudo 4: 4th pseudo variation). (Fluctuation) is a variation in which a pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed four times.

The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is missed (when other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). , The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type determining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, three types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the first special symbol is "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol", and the breakdown of the second special symbol is only "third winning symbol". In addition, each winning symbol of these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "first winning symbol", "first winning symbol A", "first winning symbol B", "first winning symbol C", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a constituent column of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution values for each winning symbol, and each distribution value "99" and "1" is the ratio when the denominator is 100. Equivalent to. Further, in the second column from the left, the "first winning symbol" and the "second winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "first winning symbol" is 99/100 (= 99%), and the ratio of selecting the "second winning symbol" is 100 minutes. It is 1 (= 1%) of. The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Selectively determine the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value. Among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte means that the winning symbol this time is selected at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H" and "02H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol and the "first winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". It will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the stop symbol selection table at the time of the first special symbol jackpot, the main control CPU 72 generates the stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
In the column on the right side of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown. In the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 6 times (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time is normal (non-time reduction state) or time reduction (time reduction state). ) Granted.

In addition, when it corresponds to the "second winning symbol", the number of time reductions is 100 times (or 104 times) regardless of whether it is during normal or time reduction. The number of time reductions is not limited to the above value, and may be 1 to 5 times, or 7 times or more (11 times or more).

Here, "6 times (or 10 times)" means that when the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 6 times or the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 10 times, the time It means that the shortened state ends.

Further, "100 times (or 104 times)" means that the time is shortened when the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 100 times or the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 104 times. It means that the state ends.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a constituent column of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. .. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "third winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value is shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "third winning symbol" is 100/100 (= 100%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT value "01H" of the lower byte represents the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol and the "third winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described by "B2H01H". ..

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
The value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game is shown in the right column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. In the present embodiment, when the "third winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 100 times (or 104 times) regardless of whether the time reduction is normal or the time reduction.

[See Fig. 24: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the jackpot variation pattern determining process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit. In this process, when the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is the "second winning symbol" or the "third winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 is set in the flag area of the RAM 76. The time reduction function operation flag as a certain game state flag is set to ON (01H) (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operation means). When the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "first winning symbol" in the non-time shortened state, the time shortening function operation flag is reset to OFF (00H), and the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "first winning symbol" in the time shortened state. In this case, the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set to ON (01H).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit is defined in advance in the small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, but a dedicated random number may be used separately. Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit is not set for the first special symbol, but is set only for the second special symbol.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In this embodiment, three types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a small hit. The breakdown of the three types is "4th winning symbol", "5th winning symbol", and "6th winning symbol". In addition, these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "fourth winning symbol", "fourth winning symbol A", "fourth winning symbol B", "fourth winning symbol C", and so on.

[Second special symbol stop symbol selection table at small hit]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a constituent column of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is also shown in the left column, and each distribution value "50", "14", "36" has the denominator. It corresponds to the ratio when it is set to 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "fourth winning symbol", the "fifth winning symbol", and the "sixth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a small hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "fourth winning symbol" is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting the "fifth winning symbol". Is 14/100 (= 14%), and the ratio of selecting the "sixth winning symbol" is 36/100 (= 36%).

As a result of this small hit, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selectively determines the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table also defines, for example, 2-byte command data as a stop symbol command at the time of winning, as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is a small hit of the second special symbol. It shows that it is a thing. Further, the EVENT values "02H", "03H", and "04H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the "fourth winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol as a result of the small hit this time, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H02H".

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the stop symbol number at the time of small hit for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started, and the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game is given. The value of is shown. In the present embodiment, when the "4th winning symbol", "5th winning symbol" or "6th winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 6 times (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time is normal or short. Times) Granted.

By using the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, and the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 is in a non-time shortened state or If the time is shortened and the "1st winning symbol to the 6th winning symbol" is applicable (the 4th winning symbol to the 6th winning symbol are limited to the case where the jackpot game is executed), the time is shortened. It is possible that the migration conditions are satisfied (transition condition setting means).

[See Fig. 24: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the small hit time variation pattern determining process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the small hit is set only for the second special symbol lottery, and at the time of the small hit, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time for the small hit is selected. A small hit may be set in the first special symbol lottery.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 23: Processing during special symbol change, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol change processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the change timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer is changed according to the passage of time (the count number of clock pulses or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement the value of the counter. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 24). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the stopped symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag.

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing during special symbol stop display. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 23) in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display processing.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the time saving function is not activated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the normal state (non-time reduction state) is entered.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed except at the time of big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. Then, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and it is simply out of alignment (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number-cutting counter. In the "count cut counter", the counter value related to the "time reduction state" is set in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76. In this embodiment, a so-called time-cutting function for cutting the number of times is adopted, and when shifting to the "time-cutting state", the first number-of-times cutting counter value related to the time-cutting state is a predetermined value (for example, 6 times or 100 times). The second count cut counter value related to the time reduction state is set to a specified value (for example, 10 times or 104 times). The information of the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value is notified (transmitted) to the effect control device 124 by the count cut counter command.
The time reduction counter value related to the time reduction state is not provided with two counter values such as the first number cut counter value and the second number cut counter value, and the time reduction state is controlled by only one counter value. May be good.

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value (first count cut counter value or second count cut counter value) is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, if the number-of-count counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value. Specifically, when the stop display of the second special symbol is being displayed, both the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value are decremented, and when the stop display of the first special symbol is being displayed. Decrements only the second cut counter value.

Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result of any of the number-cutting counter values (first number-cutting counter value or second number-cutting counter value) is 0. As a result of the subtraction, if none of the counter values for cutting the number of times is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when any of the number-cutting counter values is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number-cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, the number-of-times counter value related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 6 times). Therefore, when the second special symbol missed fluctuation (including the small hit fluctuation at that time when the specific area is not passed) is executed 6 times in the time shortened state, the time shortening function operation flag is reset. Will be done. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol is displaced six times in the time-reduced state, the time-saving function activation flag is not reset, and then the first special symbol or the second special symbol four times in the time-reduced state. When the out-of-order fluctuation is executed, the time saving function activation flag is reset. As a result, the time reduction state ends after the stop display of the special symbol is displayed. The time reduction function activation flag is described in the example of resetting when the stop display time of the special symbol has elapsed, but even if it is reset at the end of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (before the stop display time measurement starts). Good.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game processing.

In this way, the end condition (predetermined end condition) of the time shortened state is when the number of changes of the second special symbol after shifting to the time shortened state reaches the first number (for example, 6 times), or When the total number of fluctuations, which is the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the time reduction state, reaches the second number (for example, 10 times), which is larger than the first number. It is a condition that is satisfied.

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special as already described. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the time saving state display lamp 38e according to the value of the time saving function operation flag. For example, if a value (01H) is set in the time saving function operation flag when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 sets the time saving status indicator lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. A lighting signal is output to the corresponding LED. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 sends a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f. Output. Further, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 also emits a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f in addition to the time saving state display lamp 38e described above. Is output. When the launch position designation display lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game, it lights up from the start of the jackpot game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. (OFF).

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 generates lighting signals (common output data) for the jackpot type indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c based on the value of the continuous operation number status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is the combination of the indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 has all the lamps corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "10 rounds" (for example, all the lamps 38a, 38b, 38c). Generates a lighting signal for the lamp). Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "2 rounds", the main control CPU 72 generates a lighting signal for the lamp (for example, only the lamp 38a) corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "2 rounds". .. Since the three indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c can display six lighting patterns, it is possible to correspond to the five types of jackpots of the present embodiment. The details of the lighting pattern corresponding to the number of rounds are preferably displayed around the indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in order to clearly convey the details to the player.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes the game process selection process (step S5100), the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300), the large winning opening closing process (step S5400), and the end. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern as the next jump destination (step). Select S5200). On the other hand, if the large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the large winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the large winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process and the large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects the end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. .. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are opened and closed at the time of a big hit or a small hit, and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. As a result of this confirmation, when the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5203. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), that is, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5204.

Step S5203: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the winning symbol at the time of big hit is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of small hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5205: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, and the "accessory continuous actuating device" is the first variable winning device 30 or the second. It is a device that can continuously operate the variable winning device 31. The "conditional device" and the "continuous operation device for accessories" can also be used as control flags. Therefore, unless this condition device is operating, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate in the big hit game. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5212.

Step S5212: The main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol, a value representing "3 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5214.

Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol at the time of a big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol related to the special symbol. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of execution rounds, the opening time, and the interval time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5216.

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of a big hit. This open pattern setting table for each big hit symbol defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 30 or second variable winning device 31) that is operated for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol. Is. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[1st winning symbol]
When the first winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is three, and three of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the first winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the third round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened (however, it is closed when the maximum number of winning balls is confirmed. The same shall apply hereinafter). Therefore, if the ball corresponds to the first winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially three rounds of balls.

[2nd winning symbol]
When the second winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is three, and three of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the second winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the third round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if the second winning symbol is applicable, it is possible to obtain substantially three rounds of balls.

[Third winning design]
When the third winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is two, and two of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the third winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the second round takes 29.0 seconds during each round. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if the third winning symbol is applicable, it is possible to obtain substantially two rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol by referring to the opening pattern setting table for each big hit symbol.

[Refer to Fig. 33: Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
Step S5216: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated for each round (1st round to the final round) during the jackpot game to the 1st variable winning device 30 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. To do. In addition, in this embodiment, since the opening pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit is the first round to the final round, the first big winning opening 30b is opened. The operation of the first variable winning device 30 is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5218.

Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. For example, 3 rounds are set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the 3-land jackpot (first winning symbol and second winning symbol). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5220.

Step S5220: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for a round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the release timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5222.

Step S5222: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first winning opening 30b between the first round and the second round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5224.

Step S5224: The main control CPU 72 generates a command for the number of continuous operations. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5218). For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "3 rounds", so that the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "3 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 32).

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5252: The main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit game in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5254.

Step S5254: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit opening pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table at the time of small hit and selects the opening pattern. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of times of opening, the opening time, the interval time, and the opening time of the specific area 31x. ing. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5256.

[Open pattern setting table for small hits]
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. This small hit opening pattern setting table defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (second variable winning device 31). In the present embodiment, one open pattern is set at the time of a small hit, but a plurality of open patterns may be specified for each winning symbol.

When it corresponds to a small hit, the variable winning device to be operated is the second variable winning device 31. The number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened is two, and the opening time of one time is 0.9 seconds. The interval time is set to, for example, about 1.0 second.

The opening start time of the specific region 31x (timing at which the specific region solenoid 99 is turned on to operate the specific region slide member 31c) is 0.2 seconds after the opening start of the second variable winning device 31.
Further, the opening end time of the specific area 31x (the timing at which the specific area solenoid 99 is turned off to deactivate the specific area slide member 31c) is 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. ..

[See Fig. 35: Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
Step S5256: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the second variable winning device 31. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated during the small hit game in the second variable winning device 31 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5258.

Step S5258: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening to be executed during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, two times are set as the number of times the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit is opened. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5260.

Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the large winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, 0.9 seconds is set based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5262.

Step S5262: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the standby time (interval timer) between the opening of the large winning openings based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, the interval timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5264.

Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets an release timer for the specific area 31x (specific area slide member 31c). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) of the specific area 31x during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In the present embodiment, the specific area 31x is opened 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x is closed 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. Will be done.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 32).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current internal state is “important”. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer of the RAM 76, and the current internal state is "in the big hit game" depending on whether or not the "big win (big hit game)" flag is set as the internal state flag for control. Check if it is "in a big role". The flag of "during big hit (during big hit game)" is set by the main control CPU 72 during the previous process (during the process of setting the big winning opening pattern at the time of big hit: step S5212) and during the process when passing through a specific area described later. .. As a result of this confirmation, when the current internal state is "Major role" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5306. On the other hand, when the current internal state is not "Major role" (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the second variable winning device 31 to open and close the second winning opening 31b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the second winning opening solenoid 97). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S5306: The main control CPU 72 executes the first large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the first variable winning device 30 to open and close the first winning opening 30b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the first winning opening solenoid 90). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 31).

[2nd prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second prize opening opening / closing operation processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5310: The main control CPU 72 opens the second special winning opening 31b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the release timer set in the previous process (step S5260 or step S5264 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 35)). In this process, in addition to the opening timer for opening the second special winning opening 31b, a countdown for the opening timer (opening start time, opening end time) for opening the specific area 31x is performed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5314.

Step S5314: The main control CPU 72 executes the specific area opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the slide member 31c for the specific area in order to open and close the specific area 31x based on the set opening pattern (outputs a drive signal applied to the specific area solenoid 99). Perform processing. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5316.

Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the second large winning opening 31b during the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. On the other hand, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second variable winning device 31 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5320.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed per opening at the time of a small hit (the upper limit of the number of winning balls). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps of steps S5310 to S5320 described above.

When it is determined in step S5316 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5320 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. Since the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds) for the release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally indicates that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5316 that the opening time has ended before the confirmation.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 closes the second grand prize opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5324.

Step S5324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76, and confirms whether or not the specific area passing flag is ON depending on whether or not the value of the specific area passing flag is 01H. As a result of this confirmation, when the specific area passage flag is ON (Yes), that is, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main The control CPU 72 then executes step S5326. On the other hand, when the specific area passage flag is not ON (No), that is, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main control The CPU 72 then executes step S5327a. The specific area passage flag may be set to ON in the specific area opening / closing operation process (step S5314).

Step S5326: The main control CPU 72 executes the process when passing through the specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open. , The process of continuously operating the first variable winning device 30, that is, the process of starting the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means via special game, special game execution means). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5327a: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the previous process (step S5262 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 35)). Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5327b. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5327a for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 31). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5327a is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5310.

Step S5327b: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter. The value of the second large winning opening opening count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5327c: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of, for example, "the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times during one small hit". Is. In particular, when such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round, so that the counter value is set by one opening / closing operation. Since the set number of times is reached (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5328.

On the other hand, when the opening pattern of "opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small hit" is adopted, the counter value has still reached the set number of times at the end of one opening. There will be no (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5310 to S5327b are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the opening count counter progresses in step S5327b, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (step S5327c; Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5328: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 37). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Specific area opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5330: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has been started. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer for the release start time for opening the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, thereby confirming whether or not the value of the release timer is 0. Check if the 31x opening time has started. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is started (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5332. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not been started (No), or if it has already been opened, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5332: The main control CPU 72 opens the specific area 31x. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is output. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific area operates, and the specific area 31x shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5334: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area 31x. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the storage area of the RAM 76 and confirms whether or not the specific area reserve flag is ON. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is ON and the game ball has passed the specific area 31x (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5336. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is OFF and the game ball has not passed through the specific area 31x (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338.

Step S5336: The main control CPU 72 sets the specific area passage flag to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and sets the value of the specific area passage flag to 01H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338. The specific area passage flag and the specific area reserve flag are reset at the end of the big hit game.

Step S5338: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has expired. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer related to the release of the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, so that the release time of the specific area 31x is Check if it is finished. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x ends (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5340. On the other hand, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 38).

Step S5340: The main control CPU 72 closes the specific area 31x. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is stopped. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific region returns from the open state (operating state) to the closed state (non-operating state).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 38).

[Processing when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when passing through a specific area. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5350: The main control CPU 72 resets the small hit flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and resets the value of the small hit flag to 00H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5352.

Step S5352: The main control CPU 72 ends the small hit game. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 erases "small hit game in progress" from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game on the control process (small hit end). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5354.

Step S5354: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 can be continuously operated, and the big hit game can be started. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5356.

Step S5356: The main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the winning symbol. For example, when the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol is the same, a value representing "3 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5358.

Step S5358: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol when passing through the specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol when a small hit is applied. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5360.

Step S5360: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 is a variable winning device that operates every round (2 rounds to the final round) during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. The type is set to the first variable winning device 30. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5362.

Step S5362: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. For example, "10 rounds" is set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the fourth winning symbol. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5364.

Step S5364: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (4th winning symbol to 6th winning symbol) related to the special symbol when the small hit is applied. For example, in the case of the fourth winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for a round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the release timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5366.

Step S5366: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (4th winning symbol to 6th winning symbol) related to the special symbol when the small hit is applied. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first winning opening 30b between the second round and the third round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5368.

Step S5368: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5362). For example, in the case of the fourth winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5370.

Step S5370: The main control CPU 72 executes a time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through a specific area. In this process, when the winning symbols related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit are "4th winning symbol" to "6th winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the time reduction function operation flag to ON (time). Shortened state transition means, time saving function operating means). In the present embodiment, when the game ball corresponds to the "fourth winning symbol" to the "sixth winning symbol" and passes through the specific area 31x, the time is always shortened. Only the winning symbols may be shifted to the time reduction state.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 38).

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. The open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the first variable winning device 30 for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[4th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fourth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. The number of execution rounds is 10. Since the number of execution rounds includes the operation of the second variable winning device 31 opened by a small hit, in the big hit game to be started from now on, 9 rounds in which 1 round is subtracted from 10 rounds are included. This is the actual number of rounds in the jackpot game (hereinafter, the same applies to the 5th winning symbol and the 6th winning symbol). In addition, 9 out of 9 rounds are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the fourth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first large winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the 4th winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to substantially obtain 9 rounds of balls.

[5th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 7 (the number of rounds in a substantial jackpot game is 6), and 6 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the fifth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the seventh round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first large winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the fifth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to obtain substantially six rounds of balls.

[6th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 4 (the number of rounds in a substantial jackpot game is 3), and 3 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds, and the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the sixth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is 29. It operates during each round for 0 seconds to open the first prize opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the sixth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to substantially obtain three rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the large winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit, with reference to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area. Will be done.

[First prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the first special winning opening. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5380: The main control CPU 72 opens the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5382.

Step S5382: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5220 of the big hit opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 33) or step S5364 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 40)). Executes the countdown of the release timer. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5386.

Step S5386: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the first large winning opening 30b after the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. On the other hand, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5388.

Step S5388: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 30 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5390.

Step S5390: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during the big hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the above steps S5380 to S5390.

If it is determined in step S5386 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5390 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. When the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the main control CPU 72 usually steps before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5390. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended in S5386.

Step S5392: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5394.

Step S5394: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5222 of the jackpot opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 33) or step S5366 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 40)). Executes the countdown of the interval timer. Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5395. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5394 for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 31). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5394 is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5380.

Step S5395: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5396: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is, for example, in order to correspond to the opening pattern of "opening the first variable winning device 30 a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". Is. Since such an opening pattern is not particularly adopted in the present embodiment, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, since the counter value normally reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

When the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted as described above, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5380 to S5390 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5395, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

Step S5398: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 37). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for closing the large winning opening. This large winning opening closing process is for continuing or terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is in a big win (big hit game), and if it is in a big win (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5402.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached. If the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the big hit game is started after the small hit is completed, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b at the time of the small hit is treated as the first round and the big hit is performed. The first round in which the game is started is treated as the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (14 or 15 after 1 subtraction) ( No), then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 31). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, the main control CPU 72 executes the large winning opening closing process again, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds.

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[At the time of small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the value of the opening count counter is incremented.

Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after increment has reached the set open count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5258 in FIG. 35). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 31). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, and the main control CPU 72 again executes the large winning opening closing process, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S541 , Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5414.

Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the release count counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for termination processing. This termination process is for adjusting the conditions for terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the jackpot flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5503. To do.

Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the jackpot flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit in progress" from the internal state flag here, and ends the big hit game on the control process (end of big win). The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (whether it is set). This flag is used for the jackpot other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 24) during the previous special symbol change preprocessing, and the time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through the specific area during the previous specific area passage process (FIG. It is set in step S5370) in 40.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 6 times (or 10 times), 100 times (or 104 times)). To do. The value of the set time reduction number is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, in order to manage the number of time reductions, two types of time reduction counter values (first number of times cut counter value and second number of times cut counter value) are prepared. Here, the first number-of-times cut counter value is a variable that is decremented (subtracted by 1) each time the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "6" or "100" is set as an initial value. The second special symbol value is a variable that is decremented each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "10" or "104" is set as an initial value. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not 01H (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 wins when the transition condition to the time shortened state is satisfied (when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, when the winning symbol for shifting to the time shortened state is won). ), After the end of the jackpot game, advantageous conditions were applied from the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state) to the non-time shortened state (the variable time of the normal symbol lottery was shortened, and the variable start winning device It is possible to shift to a time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) in which the opening time is extended (advantageous gaming state transitioning means).

The procedure up to this point is for a big hit, but in the case of a small hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

Step S5520, Step S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and also deletes "in small hit game" from the internal state flag. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on the flag. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is reset or the major winning combination ends, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the time reduction function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "time reduction in progress" is generated as the internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 23) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Solenoid management process]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the solenoid management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described. This process is a detailed description of step S207a of FIG.

Step S2800: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the operation at power-on is completed. If it is immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the operations of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491 at the time of turning on the power are not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2810.

Step S2810: The main control CPU 72 executes the power-on operation process. In this process, the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491 are operated in a predetermined movable pattern (operation pattern). As a result, the left blade member 442 and the right blade member 438 of the start device 400 operate based on a constant movable pattern from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to the time when the power is turned off. Then, when the power-on operation is completed, it is determined in step S2800 that the operation is completed (Yes), so that step S2810 is skipped thereafter.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management processing (FIG. 18).

FIG. 46 is a timing chart showing the movable patterns of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491.

[Time t0]
The start device right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t1]
The right solenoid 481 of the start device is activated.
The start device left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t2]
The right solenoid 481 of the start device ends its operation and becomes inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t3]
The start device right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 is activated.

[Time t4]
The start device right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 ends its operation and becomes inactive.

[Time t5]
The start device right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 is inactive.

The time T1 from the time t0 to the time t1 is, for example, 50 ms.
The time T2 from the time t1 to the time t2 is, for example, 100 ms.
The time T3 from the time t2 to the time t3 is, for example, 50 ms.
The time T4 from the time t3 to the time t4 is, for example, 100 ms.
The time T5 from the time t4 to the time t5 is, for example, 500 ms.

Then, the time TA from the time t0 to the time t5 is one cycle (for example, 800 ms), and the movable pattern of this one cycle is repeatedly executed from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the power is turned off. A plurality of types of movable patterns for one cycle may be prepared, and the plurality of types of movable patterns may be repeatedly executed.

By applying such a movable pattern, the game ball that has entered the start device 400 is allowed to enter the start winning opening (452 in the start device or the right start winning opening 450 in the start device) of the first special symbol. On the other hand, more game balls can be entered into the starting winning opening (starting device left starting winning opening 454) of the normal symbol.

Specifically, assuming that 12 game balls enter the passage port 430 of the start device 400 per minute, on average, two of the game balls enter the start device right start winning opening 450. Two more game balls enter the start device starting winning opening 452, and the remaining eight game balls enter the starting device left starting winning opening 454.

Further, by executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 operates the left blade member 442 (movable body) and the right blade member 438 (movable body) in a predetermined movable pattern in the normal gaming state (first state). It is possible to enable the left blade member 442 and the right blade member 438 to operate in a predetermined movable pattern even in the time shortened state (second state) (control means).

[Game flow (1)]
FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol fluctuates in the normal mode.
When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode (park mode). The "normal mode" is a "non-time reduction state".

[F1] During a game in the normal mode, when the game ball enters the start winning opening 452 in the start device or the right starting winning opening 450 of the start device (the first in a state where the memory of the second special symbol does not exist). (If the memory of the special symbol exists), [F2] the first special symbol changes.

[F3] If the first special symbol lottery results in "missing", the state of [F1] normal mode is restarted.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F5] first winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode. [F8] The drive mode is a "time reduction state".

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F7] second winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

In this way, if you win a big hit in the first special symbol lottery while staying in the normal mode (non-time shortened state), no matter what winning symbol you correspond to, after the big hit game ends, you will drive. Move to mode.

[Game flow (2)]
FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the normal mode.
[F1] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the normal mode (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), the [F12] second special symbol changes.

[F13] If the second special symbol lottery is "missing", the state of [F1] normal mode is restarted.

[F14] The second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and when the [F15] third winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F17] fourth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F19] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F20] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[Game flow (3)]
FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode.
[F8] During a game in the drive mode, when the game ball enters the start device left start winning opening 454 of the start device 400 or the start device middle start winning opening 452 of the start device 400 (the memory of the second special symbol exists). (If the memory of the first special symbol exists), the [F2] first special symbol fluctuates. The drive mode may be in a non-time reduction state.

[F3] If it becomes "missing" in the first special symbol lottery, it will be restarted from the state of [F8] drive mode. However, in the case of the time saving final fluctuation at which the time shortening state ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode at the end of this out-of-time fluctuation.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F5] first winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F7] second winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

In this way, if you win a big hit in the first special symbol lottery while staying in the drive mode (time shortened state), no matter what winning symbol you correspond to, after the big hit game ends, you will be in the drive mode. Move to.

[Game flow (4)]
FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode.
[F8] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the drive mode (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), the [F12] second special symbol changes.

[F13] If the second special symbol lottery results in "missing", the drive mode is restarted from the [F8] drive mode. However, in the case of the time saving final fluctuation at which the time shortening state ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode at the end of this out-of-time fluctuation.

[F14] The second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and when the [F15] third winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F17] fourth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F19] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F20] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

In this way, if you win in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of whether you are staying in the normal mode (non-time reduction state) or the drive mode (time reduction state), after the jackpot game is over, , Shift to drive mode.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 and the display mode of the 7-segment display device 200 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the internal lottery of the jackpot is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they lack the apparent appealing power. Similarly, the mode of the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 is a symbolic design by a 7-segment LED or the like, and is a "winning symbol". The visual impact as "is poor. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect and a stop display effect are performed using the liquid crystal display 42 and the 7-segment display device 200.

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 42 displays the effect symbol Hz (this symbol), the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the background image corresponding to the stay mode, the image related to the notice effect, and the like, and the 7-segment display device 200. The 7-segment production design is displayed on the screen.

The effect symbol Hz displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 includes, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Displayed side by side. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed on each effect symbol. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all form a symbol sequence (effect symbol arrangement) in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

The 7-segment effect symbol displayed on the 7-segment display device 200 includes, for example, a 7-segment effect symbol on the left side, a 7-segment effect symbol in the center, and a 7-segment effect symbol on the right side. It is displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the display area of the device 200. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed on each effect symbol. Here, each of the 7-segment effect symbols constitutes a symbol sequence (effect symbol arrangement) in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

51 and 52 are continuous views showing an example of an effect image corresponding to a variable display and a stop display of a special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the fluctuation display effect and the stop display effect performed by using the liquid crystal display 42 and the 7-segment display device 200 is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) to the stop display (including the fixed stop). Further, the stop display effect is an effect indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed and that the result of the internal lottery at that time has been displayed. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 51 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), there are three rows of effect symbol Hz in the upper right region of the liquid crystal display 42. It is displayed. At this time, the effect symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Further, a fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed in the area on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the above-mentioned left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variation display of the effect symbol Hz. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed in response to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. It is a thing. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "big hit" or "small hit" instead of "missing", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are displayed in the corresponding modes (for example, blue display color, red display color, etc.). Is displayed as stopped.

In the 7-segment display device 200, the 7-segment effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a disengaged manner ("4"-"6"-"7").

Further, in the storage display device 300, since all four LEDs of the first special symbol storage display area M1 are lit, it indicates that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and the second special symbol storage. Since all the LEDs in the display area M2 are turned off, it indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 51 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is started, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls. By doing so, the variable display effect is started. The variation display of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 and the variation display of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are simply indicated by downward arrows.

A background image is displayed in the central region of the liquid crystal display 42, and this background image represents the scenery of the park. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". The "normal mode" is a non-time reduction state. In addition to this, various modes are provided for production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the internal "time saving state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the special symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color. ..

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of LEDs lit in the first special symbol storage display area M1 decreases from four to three in conjunction with this. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the memory of the first special symbol has been reduced to three, and the memory corresponding to any special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) is consumed. It is possible to teach in an easy-to-understand manner what was done.

Further, before the start of the fluctuation, the LED of the storage display area X1 is not lit, but after the start of the fluctuation, the LED of the storage display area X1 is lit, and the fluctuation of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed. Keeps lighting until.

[Left production symbol stop]
In FIG. 51 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, first, the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 are left. The production pattern stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number "8" as the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200 is stopped, and the effect symbol "8" on the left side of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is stopped. The production design that represents is stopped.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 52 (D): Next, as the 7-segment effect symbol on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, the effect symbol representing the number "3" is stopped, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is on the right. As a result, the production symbol representing the number "3" has stopped.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 52 (E): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. When the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) manner, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is also produced by the liquid crystal display 42. Similarly, the symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) manner. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number "1" is stopped as the central 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 has the number as the medium effect symbol of Hz. The production symbol representing "1" is stopped. In this case, since the combination of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are both out of "8"-"1"-"3", this fluctuation is normal. It is expressed in the production that it corresponds to the "off" of. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the LED of the storage display area X1 is turned off. As a result, it is possible to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the change of the special symbol has been completed".

The above is an example of a variation display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

[Example of production when hit symbol 2 is applicable]
FIGS. 53 to 56 are continuous diagrams showing an example of an effect when the result of the ordinary symbol lottery in the non-time shortened state corresponds to the winning symbol 2.

[Before the start of variable display production]
In FIG. 53 (A): In the 7-segment display device 200, the 7-segment effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a detached mode (“9”-“1”-“6”). Further, on the liquid crystal display 42, the effect symbol Hz is stopped and displayed in an out-of-order manner ("9"-"1"-"6").

Further, in the storage display device 300, since one LED of the first special symbol storage display area M1 is lit, it indicates that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is one, and the second special symbol storage display. Since all the LEDs in the area M2 are turned off, it indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 53 (B): When the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to fluctuate, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls to fluctuate to display the variation. The production is started. Since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of LEDs in the first special symbol storage display area M1 decreases from one to zero in conjunction with this. As for the fluctuation of the first special symbol here, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern that is out of alignment is selected.

[Animal chance production]
Further, in the illustrated example, an effect in which an animal character appears from the upper left position of the screen is executed. This effect is executed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the hit symbol 2 in the normal symbol display device 33. In this case, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time (opened for 6.0 seconds) in spite of the non-time reduction state.

[Occurrence of notice production (1st stage)]
In FIG. 53 (C): After a while from the start of fluctuation, a picture image displaying some character appears on the screen, and the advance notice effect is executed in a mode of stopping at the center of the screen. In this example, for example, the pattern image appears from the left side of the screen and is moved to the center of the screen as it is.

In addition, the animal chance production is continuing, and the production is being carried out in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance right-handed." In the illustrated example, the variable start winning device 28 is operating, and the game ball is flowing down toward the variable starting winning device 28.

[Occurrence of notice production (second stage)]
In FIG. 54 (D): Following the first-stage advance notice effect, the second-stage advance notice effect is executed. In the illustrated example, another picture image additionally appears from the right edge of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed picture image. By executing such a notice effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it may reach.

In addition, the animal chance production is continuing, and the production is being carried out in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance right-handed." In the illustrated example, the variable start winning device 28 is activated and the game ball is entered.

[Left production symbol stop]
In FIG. 54 (E): Following the advance notice effect, the effect symbol representing the number "2" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is stopped. As the left effect symbol, the effect symbol representing the number "2" is stopped.

Further, when the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the memory of the second special symbol is increased by one, so that one LED of the second special symbol storage display area M2 is lit.
The variable start winning device 28 becomes inactive after a certain period of time (6.0 seconds) has elapsed or after a predetermined number (for example, one) of winnings. In the illustrated example, since one game ball has entered the variable start winning device 28, the variable start winning device 28 is closed. When the variable start winning device 28 is closed, the animal chance production ends. The specified number may be two or more.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 54 (F): Next, as the 7-segment effect symbol on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, the effect symbol representing the number "4" is stopped, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is on the right. As a result, the production symbol representing the number "4" has stopped.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 55 (G): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. When the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) manner, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is also produced by the liquid crystal display 42. Similarly, the symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) manner. In the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number "3" is stopped as the central 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200, and the number "3" is used as the medium effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol representing "" is stopped.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 55 (H): When the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to fluctuate, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates to produce a variable display effect. It will be started. Since the number of working memories of the second special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of LEDs in the second special symbol storage display area M2 decreases from one to zero in conjunction with this. As for the fluctuation of the second special symbol here, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small hit winning is selected. Here, when the control of preferential digestion of the second special symbol is adopted, the memory of the second special symbol is preferentially digested. On the other hand, when the control of the forward digestion of the special symbols is adopted, the fluctuations of the special symbols are executed in the order of memory. In the illustrated example, since the memory of the first special symbol does not exist, the variation of the second special symbol is executed regardless of which control is adopted.

[Left production symbol stop]
In FIG. 55 (I): After a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 is stopped. As the left effect symbol of Hz, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 56 (J): Next, as the 7-segment effect symbol on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, the effect symbol representing the number "2" is stopped, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is on the right. As a result, the production symbol representing the number "2" has stopped.

[Stop the middle production design]
In FIG. 56 (K): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. When the result of this internal lottery is a small hit and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is also the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. Similarly, the stop display effect is performed in the form of a small hit. In the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the alphabet "A" is stopped as the central 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol "A" of the alphabet is used as the medium effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol representing "" is stopped. In addition, an animal character is displayed large on the liquid crystal display 42. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player that "it corresponds to a small hit via the animal chance". Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to a small hit. Then, after this, a small hit game is executed.

[Direction during a major role]
57 and 58 are continuous views partially showing an example of a big role playing effect performed during a big hit game. In addition, the following production during the important role is an production executed by the liquid crystal display 42.

[Big hit game start]
In FIG. 57 (A): When the jackpot game is started, for example, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the screen, and a unique production image (for example, a female character) is displayed during the jackpot game. ..

["Right-handed" display during major roles]
Further, in the present embodiment, since the first variable winning device 30 is arranged in the right side portion in the game area 8a, the right side portion in the game area 8a is designated as the launch position (launch direction) of the game ball during the big role. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the above-mentioned firing position designation display lamp 38f is lit and displayed under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the firing position designation command indicating "right-handed" is transmitted to the effect control device 124. In response to this, guidance information (arrow indicating the right direction, characters of "right-handed", etc.) prompting "right-handed" is displayed in the display screen on the effect control by the effect control CPU 126).

[1st round]
In FIG. 57 (B): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, three circles are displayed along with the character information of "BIG BONUS" in the upper left part of the screen. Then, the ○ mark located on the leftmost side is displayed in red (hatching of diagonal lines), and the remaining two ○ marks are displayed in white. As a result, the number of balls that can be obtained is 3 rounds, the current round is the 1st round of the 3 rounds, and each round in which a ball can be obtained is marked with a circle. It is possible to teach the player that it is displayed in red.

Here, the number of "○" marks increases according to the winning symbols. For example, when the winning symbol is the "first winning symbol" or the "second winning symbol", the number of "○" is "3", but the winning symbol is the "third winning symbol". In this case, the number of "○" is "2". If the winning symbol is the "4th winning symbol", the number of "○ marks" is "9", and if the winning symbol is the "5th winning symbol", the number of "○ marks" is "○". The number of "○" is "6", and when the winning symbol is the "sixth winning symbol", the number of "○" is "3".

[3rd round]
In FIG. 57 (C): After that, the jackpot game progresses smoothly, and when, for example, the game shifts to the third round, all three circles are displayed in red. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that all the rounds in which the ball can be obtained in the third round are completed.

[Time reduction state rush production]
In FIG. 58 (D): Then, the effect of displaying the character information such as "Enter drive mode!" Is executed using the end time (ending time) of the jackpot game. This makes it possible to teach the player that the "drive mode" will be started from now on. In addition, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the game proceeds by hitting right even in the "drive mode".

Here, during the ending production, a notification is given to urge the forgetting to remove the prepaid card such as "Be careful not to forget to take the prepaid card", or a notification such as "Be careful about being absorbed in the game" is prevented. The notification may be executed.

[Big hit game finished, time shortened state]
In FIG. 58 (E): When the jackpot game is completed and the internal state (game state) is set to the time reduction state, the stay mode is set to the "drive mode", and the background image is the car on which the woman is riding. It will be changed to an image that expresses the state of running on the ground. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the current internal state (game state) is a time shortened state different from the normal state.

[Time saving and medium production]
In this way, when the game is proceeding in the time-reduced state, the time-saving medium-time effect (advantageous game state effect) for displaying the background image corresponding to the time-reduced state (advantageous game state) is executed.

[Right-handed suggestion production]
Further, at the upper part of the screen, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed. In the right-handed suggestion effect, right-handed character information and a right-pointing arrow symbol are displayed on the upper left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. It should be noted that such a right-handed suggestion effect may be continuously executed when the game state is in the time shortened state, or may be executed only at the start of the time shortened state. Then, by executing such an effect, it is possible to urge the player to "hit right".

[Remaining number display effect]
Further, at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the remaining number of times display effect is executed. In the remaining number display effect, a rectangular area is provided at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the remaining number of times the game can be advanced in the drive mode is displayed in the rectangular area. In the illustrated example, the information of "remaining 10 times" is displayed. The remaining number of times is deducted by 1 each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortened state, and is deducted by 1 each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the non-time shortened state. Therefore, the remaining number of times is not subtracted even if the first special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortened state or the non-time shortened state.

[Example of drive mode (time reduction state)]
59 to 61 are continuous views showing an example of a drive mode effect.

In FIG. 59 (A): In the drive mode, the background image is changed to an image representing a state in which a car in which a woman is riding is traveling on the ground. The combination of the 7-segment effect symbols displayed on the 7-segment display device 200 is the winning item of "7"-"7"-"7", and the combination of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is "7"-"7". "-" 7 "is the winning item. This shows the outcome at the time of winning. Further, at the upper part of the screen, the right-handed suggestion effect is executed, and such a right-handed suggestion effect is continuously executed when the game state is the time shortened state.

[Start of fluctuation of special symbol]
In FIG. 59 (B): At the time of the first hit with the first special symbol, the memory of the first special symbol is often stored, and the memory of the second special symbol is generally not stored. In the illustrated example, one memory of the first special symbol is stored (one LED of the first special symbol storage display area M1 is lit). Therefore, when the drive mode is entered in such a situation, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the memory of the first special symbol is not accumulated, the player executes a right-handed strike to first execute the change of the second special symbol. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to change, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z1 also change. To start. Here, in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol, it is assumed that it corresponds to the loss.

[End of change of 1st special symbol]
In FIG. 59 (C): When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a detached manner, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. Z1 is also displayed as a stop in the form of being off. During this time, it is assumed that the player executes a right-handed hit, a plurality of game balls pass through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and four game balls enter the right start winning opening 28b. .. In this case, four memories of the second special symbol are stored (all four LEDs in the second special symbol display area M2 are lit).

Here, since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is not subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times remains as the remaining 10 times.

In FIG. 60 (D): Since the memory of the second special symbol is digested with priority over the memory of the first special symbol, the internal lottery is next executed using the memory of the second special symbol. Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to change, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 also change. To start. Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol.

[Starting small hits, opening the second big prize opening]
In FIG. 60 (E): Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 (combination of "5"-"2"-"6"). , The effect symbol Hz (combination of "5"-"2"-"6" of the liquid crystal display 42) and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small hit mode. .. As a result, the small hit game is started, and the second big winning opening 31b is opened. Then, the car in which the female character is riding speeds up and moves to the right side of the screen.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the remaining number of times is displayed as 9 times remaining.

In FIG. 60 (F): When the small hit game is started, a production in which the hermit character utters the line "Aim at the attacker in the lower right" is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player that the game ball must be entered into the second variable winning device 31.

[Passing through a specific area]
In FIG. 61 (G): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to the small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is the sixth winning symbol. To do. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and issues a line such as "Yeah! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End small hit, start big hit game]
In FIG. 61 (H): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is.

After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 57B, and the same production during the big hit game as described above is started, and the big hit game proceeds. For example, if the winning symbol at the time of a small hit related to the second special symbol corresponds to the sixth winning symbol, it is possible to substantially obtain three rounds of balls. When the big hit game is executed in the drive mode, the big role production dedicated to the winning in the drive mode may be executed.

62 and 63 are continuous views showing an example of effect when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Such a situation occurs mainly when the memory of the second special symbol is accumulated, although it is different in the final fluctuation of the time shortened state.

Here, it is assumed that four memories of the second special symbol exist before the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol. For this reason, the time-saving and medium-time production is continuously executed. Further, as the remaining number of times display effect, the information of "remaining 4 times" is displayed. However, the right-handed suggestion effect has not been executed.

[During display of fluctuations in special symbols]
In FIG. 62 (A): When the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to change, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The fluctuation of the effect symbol Hz of the vessel 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 is also started. Since the situation here is not in a time-reduced state, the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is low even if the player passes through the starting gate 20. Therefore, it is difficult for the variable start winning device 28 to shift to the open state, and basically, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be stored. Therefore, the drive mode in such a non-time shortened state becomes a chance zone in which the second special symbol fluctuates up to four times.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 62 (B): Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the 7-segment effect symbol (combination of "2"-"2"-"3") of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. The symbol Hz (combination of "2"-"2"-"3") and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small hit mode. In this case, the effect that the animal character raises the "mark on which the number 7 is displayed" is executed.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is the remaining three times.

[Starting small hits, opening the second big prize opening]
In FIG. 62 (C): Then, when the small hit game is started, the second big winning opening 31b is opened, and the car on which the female character is riding speeds up and moves to the right side of the screen. Will be executed. At this time, an effect of leaving the animal character behind is executed.

[Passing through a specific area]
In FIG. 63 (D): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to the small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is the fourth winning symbol. To do. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and issues a line such as "Yeah! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End small hit, start big hit game]
In FIG. 63 (E): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 57B, and the same production during the big hit game as described above is started, and the big hit game proceeds.

FIGS. 64 to 67 are diagrams showing an example of a first effect of the button continuous striking effect executed during the reach effect. The first production example is an production example when the player properly presses (continuously hits) the push button 45a. The push button 45a may be pressed and held for a long time to accept an operation input as if the push button is repeatedly hit, and the push button can be set by the player at the start of the game or during the game by setting the automatic pressing function. The operation input may be accepted without pressing 45a.

In FIG. 64 (A): The variable display effect is executed by the 7-segment display device 200 and the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 64 (B): When a certain time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the reach effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the effect symbol Hz and the 7-segment effect symbol are displayed in the reach state (tempai) mode ("5"-"changing"-"5").

In FIG. 64 (C): Reach production is in progress. In the illustrated example, the ally character (female character) is displayed on the left side of the screen, the enemy character (animal character) is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the character information of "VS" is displayed in the center. In this situation, if the ally character wins, it will be a big hit.

[SU1]
In FIG. 65 (D): When a certain time elapses from the occurrence of the reach state, the button repeated hitting effect is started. Specifically, a button image imitating the push button 45a is displayed in the center of the screen. Around the button image, a time meter indicating the passage of the effective time of the button repeated hitting effect is displayed so as to surround the button image, and here, one square corresponds to about 1 second. In the illustrated example, since all the time meters of 8 squares are displayed as colored images, pressing the push button 45a is effective for about 8 seconds from now on. That is, the effective time of the button repeated hitting effect is 8 seconds. In addition, each cell of the time meter decreases by 1 cell every 1 second elapses.

Further, at the lower part of the screen, a horizontally long rod-shaped meter M having four squares is displayed. The meter M is a physical strength meter that indicates the remaining physical strength of the enemy character. When all the colored parts of the meter M are exhausted, the remaining physical strength of the enemy character is exhausted, and the ally character wins.
When the player presses the push button 45a once during the execution of the button continuous striking effect and the condition for advancing the meter M is satisfied, the effect of reducing the colored portion of the meter value M (progress effect) is executed. At the top of the screen, an animal character that utters the line "continuous hit" is displayed. "SU1" is the first stage of the button repeated hitting effect.

[SU2]
In FIG. 65 (E): Then, it is assumed that the player starts to repeatedly hit the push button 45a, and here, the condition for advancing only one meter M is satisfied. In this case, the effect of reducing the colored portion of the meter M by one square is executed. "SU2" is the second stage of the button repeated hitting effect. When the player presses the push button 45a, an image of an ally character attacking is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the pressing of the push button 45a is output, and the push button 45a is pressed at the top of the button image. An image of the fist is displayed to indicate that it is.
Further, in the illustrated example, since 6 squares of the 8 squares time meter are displayed as colored images, the effective time of the push button 45a is about 6 seconds remaining.

[SU3]
In FIG. 65 (F): It is assumed that the player continues to repeatedly hit the push button 45a, and here, the condition for advancing the meter M by one more is satisfied. In this case, an effect is executed in which the colored portion of the meter M is further reduced by one square. "SU3" is the third stage of the button repeated hitting effect.
Further, in the illustrated example, since 4 squares of the 8 squares time meter are displayed as colored images, the effective time of the push button 45a is about 4 seconds remaining.

[SU4]
In FIG. 66 (G): It is assumed that the player continues to repeatedly hit the push button 45a, and here, the condition for advancing the meter M by one more is satisfied. In this case, an effect is executed in which the colored portion of the meter M is further reduced by one square. "SU4" is the fourth stage of the button repeated hitting effect.
Further, in the illustrated example, since 2 squares of the 8 squares time meter are displayed as colored images, the effective time of the push button 45a is about 2 seconds remaining.

〔success〕
In FIG. 66 (H): It is assumed that the player continues to repeatedly hit the push button 45a, and here, the condition for advancing the meter M by one more is satisfied. In this case, an effect is executed in which the colored portion of the meter M is further reduced by one square. "Success" is the final stage of the button stroke production.
As a result, all the colored parts of the meter M disappear. In this case, the accessory falling effect in which the movable body 40f falls in the center of the screen is executed, and the character information of "success" is displayed on the meter M.
The time meter indicating the effective time of the push button 45a is hidden.

In FIG. 66 (I): When a successful result is obtained in the button repeated hitting effect, the winning effect indicating that the current fluctuation is a big hit is executed. In the illustrated example, the ally character is displayed in a large size, and the effect that the enemy character leaves is executed. In this case, the first special symbol, the effect symbol Hz, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the fourth symbol 1 are stopped and displayed in the winning mode.

The above is an production example when the button continuous striking effect is successful, but when the button continuous striking effect is unsuccessful, the following production example is used.

[SU4]
In FIG. 67 (J): It is assumed that the player continues to repeatedly hit the push button 45a, and here, the condition for advancing the meter M by one more is satisfied. In this case, an effect is executed in which the colored portion of the meter M is further reduced by one square. "SU4" is the fourth stage of the button repeated hitting effect.
Further, in the illustrated example, since 2 squares of the 8 squares time meter are displayed as colored images, the effective time of the push button 45a is about 2 seconds remaining.

[Failure]
In FIG. 67 (K): It is assumed that the player continues to repeatedly hit the push button 45a, and here, the condition for advancing only one meter M is not satisfied. In this case, the effect of maintaining the colored portion of the meter M is executed.
As a result, the colored portion of the meter M remains for one square. In this case, the character fall effect is not executed, the effect that the enemy character flicks off the attack of the ally character is executed, and the character information of "failure" is displayed on the meter M.
It should be noted that such a failure effect may be executed before the valid time ends, at the same time as the valid time ends, or after the valid time ends.

In FIG. 67 (L): When the result of failure is obtained in the button repeated hitting effect, the off-set effect indicating that the current fluctuation is out-of-order is executed. In the illustrated example, an effect is executed in which the ally character is displayed small and the enemy character is displayed large. In this case, the first special symbol, the effect symbol Hz, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the fourth symbol 1 are stopped and displayed in a detached manner.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a second effect example of the button continuous striking effect executed during the reach effect. The second production example is an production example when the player does not properly press the push button 45a.

[SU1]
In FIG. 68 (A): A certain time has passed since the reach state occurred, and the button repeated hitting effect is executed. However, here, it is assumed that the player has not pressed the push button 45a.
Further, in the illustrated example, since all the time meters of 8 squares are displayed as colored images, the effective time of the push button 45a is about 8 seconds remaining.

[SU1]
In FIG. 68 (B): Unless the player presses the push button 45a, the colored portion of the meter M does not decrease. However, the effective time of the button repeated hitting effect is gradually decreasing.
In the illustrated example, since 2 squares of the 8-square time meter are displayed as colored images, the effective time of the push button 45a is about 2 seconds remaining.

[SU2]
In FIG. 68 (C): Then, it is assumed that the player starts the continuous striking of the push button 45a immediately before the effective time of the button continuous striking effect ends. Then, the condition for advancing only one meter M is forcibly satisfied due to the dissociation between MaxIndex and NowIndex, which will be described later. In this case, the effect of reducing the colored portion of the meter M by one square is executed.

As described above, even if the player starts the continuous striking of the push button 45a immediately before the end of the effective time, the stage of the button continuous striking effect proceeds only one step at a time until the effective time ends. After that, when the valid time ends, the effect at the time of winning or the effect at the time of losing is executed.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a third effect of the button continuous striking effect executed during the reach effect. The third effect example is an effect example when the player operates the lever member 45b.

[SU1]
In FIG. 69 (A): A certain time has passed since the reach state occurred, and the button repeated hitting effect is executed. However, here, it is assumed that the player has not pressed the push button 45a.
In the illustrated example, since all the time meters of 8 squares are displayed as colored images, the effective time of the push button 45a is about 8 seconds remaining.

In FIG. 69 (B): Here, it is assumed that the player operates the lever member 45b instead of the push button 45a.

〔success〕
In FIG. 69 (C): When the lever member 45b is operated, the player can suddenly know the final result.
When the success scenario is selected, the accessory drop effect in which the movable body 40f falls in the center of the screen is executed, and the special notification effect in which the character information of "success" is displayed on the meter M is executed. After that, such a special notification effect is continuously executed until the valid time elapses, and after the valid time elapses, the effect at the time of winning (the effect of aligning three effect symbols, etc.) is executed. Will be done.

If the failure scenario is selected, the character fall effect is not executed, the effect that the enemy character flicks off the attack of the ally character is executed, and the special notification that the character information of "failure" is displayed on the meter M. The production is executed. After that, such a special notification effect is continuously executed until the effective time elapses, and after the effective time elapses, the effect at the time of disconnection (the effect of not aligning three effect symbols, etc.) is executed. Will be done.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the above effect will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach advance notice effect, major role effect, effect using liquid crystal display 42 or 7-segment display device 200, storage display device 300, time saving medium effect, right-handed suggestion effect, remaining number of times The display effect, the button repeated press effect, and the like are all controlled through the following control processes.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium other effect processing (step S402a), and 7-segment display device. Effect management process (step S403), normal symbol effect management process (step S403a), button repeated press effect management process (step S403b), display output process (step S404), lamp drive process (step S406), acoustic drive process (step S408). ), The effect random number update process (step S410), and other processes (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special symbol destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory increase effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory decrease effect command, and a start command. Mouth winning sound control command, demo production command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, status specification command, round number command, launch position specification command, error notification command, jackpot There are end effect command, fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, number cut counter command, various error commands, variable start winning device long open start command, etc.

Step S401: In the working memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the effect using the storage display device 300. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, and the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable. It controls the content of the effect when the winning device 31 is opened and closed. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern of various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). As described above, in the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 displays the effect content displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 (effect symbol Hz, fourth symbol Z1, Z2, effect content related to the important role production, etc., content of various advance notice effects). Executes the process of determining. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S402a: The effect control CPU 126 executes other effect processes such as during the time reduction and during the pseudo time reduction. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the effect contents related to the right-handed suggestion effect, the remaining number of times display effect, and the like. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S403: In the 7-segment display device effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of controlling the 7-segment display device 200 based on the effect content determined in the effect symbol management process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the effect content (content related to the 7-segment effect symbol) to be displayed on the 7-segment display device 200. It is preferable that the effect symbol Hz and the 7-segment effect symbol basically perform the same operation, but they may perform different operations. When different operations are performed, for example, the timing at which the effect symbol Hz and the 7-segment effect symbol stop may be different, or the stop symbol may be different.

Step S403a: In the normal symbol effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect (animal chance effect) when a chance state for the second special symbol occurs. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing the animal chance effect between the time when the variable start prize device long open start command is received and the time when the variable start prize device 28 is closed. To do.

Step S403b: In the button continuous striking effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of controlling the content related to the button continuous striking effect.

By executing this process, the effect control CPU 126 uses the push button 45a and the lever member 45b to execute a button continuous striking effect (stage effect) in which the stage of the effect is gradually advanced from the first stage to the final stage. It is possible (means for executing stepwise production).

Further, by executing this process, the effect control CPU 126 does not satisfy a predetermined condition from the start to the end of the effective time for enabling the operation of the push button 45a and the lever member 45b ( If the lever member is not operated (unless the deviation between MaxIndex and NowIndex, which will be described later, is a certain number or more), the stage of producing the button continuous striking effect is advanced according to the first progress mode, and if the predetermined conditions are satisfied ( If the lever member is operated (if the deviation between MaxIndex and NowIndex, which will be described later, is a certain number or more), a progress effect is executed in which the stage of the effect of the button repeated hitting effect is advanced by the second progress mode different from the first progress mode. Make it possible (progressive production execution means).

The first mode of progress is a mode in which the stage of the effect of repeatedly pressing the buttons is advanced one step at a time to the next stage according to the passage of the effective time.
The second mode of progress when the difference between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number or more is a mode in which the stage of the effect of repeatedly pressing the buttons is advanced one step at a time regardless of the passage of the effective time.
The second progress mode executed when the lever member is operated is a mode in which a special notification effect is executed (progress effect execution means).

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with respect to the basic control information of the effect content (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , Working memory effect pattern number, look-ahead notice effect pattern number, change effect pattern number, change notice effect number, background pattern number, etc.) are instructed. As a result, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146 and VDP152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect execution means).

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp drive circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp drive circuit 132 drives various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like (lighting or extinguishing, blinking, change in luminance gradation, etc.) based on the control signal.

Step S408: In the next acoustic drive process, the effect control CPU 126 transmits the effect content (for example, BGM during variable display effect, reach effect, mode transition effect, jackpot effect, etc.) to the sound drive circuit 134. Instruct. As a result, the speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sounds according to the content of the effect.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates by using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above-mentioned effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect content in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the effect symbol management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a effect command for increasing the number of operating memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories increases. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S702. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of lighting one LED of the first special symbol storage display area M1 or one LED of the second special symbol storage display area M2. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 may determine the effect pattern and effect scenario of the color change effect (for example, the display color of the LED in the storage display area X1 and the display color of the LED in the effect display area X2). it can.

Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect control CPU 126 has received the effect command when the number of operating memories is reduced. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is saved (step S704: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for reducing the number of working memories is saved (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of turning off one LED of the first special symbol storage display area M1 or one LED of the second special symbol storage display area M2 corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery. , Select an effect of lighting the LED of the storage display area X1. The LED of the storage display area X1 is selected to be turned off when the change of the special symbol is completed. Further, when the LED of the effect display area X2 is turned on, the effect of turning off the LED of the effect display area X2 when the change of the special symbol is completed is selected.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation preprocessing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process has been completed, the next step. Select the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) as the jump destination of. Further, the variable winning device operating time process (step S508) is selected as the jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 23) is selected in the main control CPU 72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type (type of winning symbol), variation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern (reach) for the advance notice effect. Select a pre-occurrence notice pattern, a post-occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructed to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the push button 45a or the lever member 45b during the execution of the variable display effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and the effect content according to the result ( The control information of the button repeated pressing effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) actually ends the variable display effect that has been executed so far in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effect (design effect execution). means).

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect content during the small hit game or the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the effect during the big role according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol variation preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called waiting state for customers.
In addition, in the effect indicating the waiting state for customers, a content for preventing the devotion to the game such as "Be careful about the devotion to the game" may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily execute the effect related to the prevention of entanglement at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the content of the demo effect based on the demo effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 70) and the lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 70). To do.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or the outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is a jackpot. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes the small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can refer to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and select the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. it can. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule (variation time) and stop of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time. Determine the display mode and the like.

For example, the effect control CPU 126 changes the effect symbol Hz, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 in the "drive mode" state when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the time shortened state, and finally becomes small. A process of selecting an effect pattern for stopping and displaying the effect symbol Hz, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to the hit is executed.

On the other hand, when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the non-time shortened state, the effect control CPU 126 has, for example, the effect symbol Hz, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the fourth in the state where the "drive mode" is continued or the normal mode. The process of varying the symbol Z2 and finally selecting the effect symbol Hz corresponding to the small hit, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the effect pattern for stopping and displaying the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol. For example, when a variation pattern corresponding to the reach effect (reach variation pattern, super reach variation pattern, etc.) is selected, the effect control CPU 126 can select a reach effect in which a ally character and an enemy character are made to play against each other. It should be noted that this point is the same at the time of a miss or a small hit.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is out of alignment in step S604 (Yes), it then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of loss are classified into "out-of-time normal fluctuation", "time-saving out-of-time fluctuation", "out-of-reach variation", and the like, and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "out-of-reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control CPU 126 selects is determined based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time (variation time and reach). The presence or absence of occurrence, the reach type and reach occurrence timing in the case of reach occurrence), and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.) are determined. It should be noted that the method of determining the effect at the time of such a loss is the same at the time of a big hit.

When determining the variable effect pattern at the time of a small hit, a large hit, or a miss, it is possible to also determine the effect pattern of the pseudo continuous notice effect (pseudo-ream).

When any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display effect this time by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or to notify that there is a possibility of a big hit or a small hit in the end. .. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set higher at the time of winning in order to raise the expectation of the player.

Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes the mode effect management process (advantageous game state effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, in principle, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the normal mode when the internal state is the non-time shortened state, and when the internal state is the time shortened state, the effect control CPU 126 executes the process. The process of selecting the background image corresponding to the drive mode (the process of selecting the time saving and medium effect) is executed.

However, as an exception, the effect control CPU 126 has a case where the memory of the second special symbol exists when the state shifts from the time shortened state to the non-time shortened state even when the internal state is the non-time shortened state. Select a background image corresponding to the drive mode (advantageous gaming state effect executing means, advantageous gaming state effect continuous executing means). It should be noted that such an exceptional process is executed in the process during the display of the effect symbol stop, which will be described later.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent processing during effect symbol variation (step S504 in FIG. 72), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (symbol effect execution means). The notice effect is executed based on various notice effect patterns. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here.

[Processing during display of production symbol stop]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process during the display of the effect symbol stop display. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S650: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by the fluctuation pattern command (hereinafter, the same applies).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S652, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control CPU 126 steps. Execute S656.

Step S652: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the time reduction is the final variation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can access the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and check the number-of-times counter command to check whether or not the time reduction is the final variation. For example, if the first count cut counter value or the second count cut counter value fluctuates when switching from "1" to "0", the effect control CPU 126 can determine that the time reduction final fluctuation.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the time reduction final variation is (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S654, and when it cannot be confirmed that the time reduction final variation is (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666. ..

Step S654: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the storage number of the second special symbol in the pseudo time reduction counter. The pseudo time saving counter is stored in the RAM 130. For example, when the storage number of the second special symbol is "0", the pseudo time saving counter is set to "0" and the storage number of the second special symbol is "1". , "1" is set in the pseudo time saving counter, and "4" is set in the pseudo time saving counter when the number of stored second special symbols is "4".
When this process is completed, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666.

Step S656: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the stay background is a normal background, that is, whether or not the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is a background image corresponding to the normal mode.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666, and when it cannot be confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (No), the effect control CPU 126 steps. Execute S658.

Step S658: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is larger than 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S660 and determines that the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0. If it cannot be confirmed (No), that is, if the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is 0, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S664.

Step S660: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background as a pseudo time-saving background. The pseudo time saving background is a drive mode background in which the right-handed display is not displayed.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the pseudo time reduction counter even when the time reduction state (advantageous game state) ends and the time shifts to the non-time reduction state (predetermined game state). When the value is larger than 0 (when a special condition is satisfied), the time-saving and medium-time effect (advantageous game state effect) can be continuously executed (advantageous game state effect continuous execution means). ..

Step S662: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo time reduction counter.

Step S664: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background as the normal background. The normal background is the background of the normal mode.

Step S666: The effect control CPU 126 executes other processing. In other processing, as described above, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect in the mode according to the result of the internal lottery.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 72).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when the variable winning device is operated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the result of this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the lottery result command, and confirms whether it corresponds to a big hit or a small hit. As a result of this confirmation, if the result of this fluctuation is a big hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S802. On the other hand, if the result of this fluctuation is not a big hit (No), that is, if it is a small hit, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S804.

Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process when the jackpot variable winning device is operated. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores various image data related to the effect pattern at the time of a big hit, which is stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP152), as a large role effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. The process of reading according to the winning symbol is executed.

Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes the small hit variable winning device operation time process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern (for example, an effect in which a car on which a female character is riding speeds up) indicating that the small hit game has started at the start of the small hit game, and suggests right-handed strike. If you select the effect to be performed and the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the effect pattern when passing through the specific area (a heart mark with the letter V drawn by the female character in the car) Execute the process of selecting the effect to be listed).

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 72).

[Time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium and other production processing]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the time saving medium, the pseudo time saving medium, and other effect processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Here, the time reduction medium (time reduction) is a time reduction state, and the pseudo time reduction medium (pseudo time reduction) is a state in which the background image during the time reduction is displayed in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction state). Drive mode).

Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes steps S852 and S854, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control The CPU 126 executes step S856.

Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 executes the remaining number of times display process based on the remaining number of time reductions. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the count cut counter command, and selects an effect pattern that displays the value obtained by adding "4" to the second count cut counter value as the remaining number of times. Execute the process to be performed. As a result, during the time reduction, the value of "remaining 10 times to remaining 5 times" or "remaining 100 times to remaining 5 times" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes the right-handed suggestion effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the right-handed suggestion effect at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S855: The effect control CPU 126 executes the right-handed emphasis effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 displays a liquid crystal display when it becomes necessary to execute a right-handed emphasis effect, for example, when the player continues to left-handed even though the time has been shortened. At the upper part of the screen of the vessel 42, a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the effect of emphasizing right-handed striking is executed.

Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction. When the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0, the effect control CPU 126 can determine that the pseudo time saving is in progress.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S858, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (No), the effect control CPU 126 is executed. Returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes the remaining number display process based on the pseudo time reduction counter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern that displays the value of the pseudo time reduction counter as the remaining number of times. As a result, in the simulated time reduction, the value of "remaining 4 times to remaining 1 time (last)" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

[Button repeated hitting production management process]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the button repeated hitting effect management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S860: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current state is the state before the start of the change (at the start of the change, the timing of executing the effect symbol change pre-processing).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current state is the state before the start of fluctuation (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S861. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the state before the start of fluctuation (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S862.

Step S861: The effect control CPU 126 executes the button repeated press effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute the button continuous striking effect, and if it is determined to execute, determines the effect content of the button continuous striking effect.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute the button repeated press effect based on the variation pattern, the variation display effect, the content of the advance notice effect, and the like. When it is decided to execute the button continuous striking effect, a process of determining what kind of content of the button continuous striking effect is to be executed at what timing and schedule is executed.

Step S862: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current state is the start of the button repeated press effect. The start time of the button continuous striking effect is the timing when the button continuous striking effect is actually started. Whether or not it is the start of the button continuous striking effect can be confirmed by counting the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation while referring to the execution timing of the button continuous striking effect.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current state is the start time of the button continuous striking effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S863. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the start time of the button repeated pressing effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S864.

Step S863: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process at the start of the button repeated press effect.
In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be displayed at the start of the button continuous press effect and setting the effective time of the button.

Step S864: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current state is executing the button repeated press effect. The execution of the button continuous striking effect means that the button continuous striking effect is actually being executed. Whether or not the button continuous striking effect is being executed can be confirmed by counting the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation while referring to the execution timing of the button continuous striking effect.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current state is executing the button continuous striking effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S865. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the execution of the button continuous striking effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S866.

Step S865: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process during the button repeated press effect execution.
In this process, a process of selecting the content of the effect to be displayed during the execution of the button repeated press effect is executed.

Step S866: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current state is the end of the button repeated press effect. The end of the button continuous striking effect is the timing at which the button continuous striking effect actually ends. Whether or not it is the end of the button continuous striking effect can be confirmed by counting the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation while referring to the execution timing of the button continuous striking effect.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current state is the end of the button repeated striking effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S867. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the current state is at the end of the button repeated pressing effect (No), the process returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

Step S867: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process at the end of the button repeated press effect.
In this process, a process of selecting the content of the effect to be displayed at the end of the button repeated press effect is executed.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

[Button repeated hitting effect selection process]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the button repeated hitting effect selection process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S870: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the effect execution condition of the button repeated press effect is satisfied. As the effect execution condition of the button repeated hitting effect, for example, a variation pattern having a variation time of a predetermined time or more is selected, or a reach effect (reach variation pattern, etc.) in which a friendly character and an enemy character compete against each other is selected. In some cases, the conditions can be met. Even if the reach effect is not selected, the button repeated press effect may be executed.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the effect execution condition of the button repeated press effect is satisfied (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S872. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the effect execution condition of the button continuous press effect is satisfied (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button continuous press effect management process (FIG. 77).

Step S872: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the fluctuation this time is a fluctuation corresponding to a big hit.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation this time is a fluctuation corresponding to the big hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S874. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the fluctuation this time is a fluctuation corresponding to the big hit (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S876.

Step S874: The effect control CPU 126 executes the success scenario selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a success scenario for notifying the result of success in the button repeated press effect. If there is a success scenario table in which a plurality of success scenarios are stored, one of the success scenarios is selected from the table.

Step S876: The effect control CPU 126 executes the failure scenario selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a failure scenario for notifying the result of the failure in the button repeated press effect. If there is a failure scenario table in which a plurality of failure scenarios are stored, one of the failure scenarios is selected from the table.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button repeated press effect management process (FIG. 77).

[Processing at the start of repeated button press production]
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process at the start of the button repeated pressing effect. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S877: The effect control CPU 126 executes the scenario setting process of the button repeated press effect. In this process, a process of setting a success scenario or a failure scenario selected in the process of step S874 or step S876 of FIG. 78 is executed. The button repeated hitting effect is executed based on the scenario set in this process.

Step S878: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effective time setting process. In this embodiment, the effective time of the push button is 8 seconds (240 frames). The effective time is subtracted with the passage of time from the start of the button repeated hitting effect, and the effective time ends when it reaches 0 seconds. The elapsed time is indicated by a time meter displayed around the button image.

Step S879: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process at the start of the button repeated press effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern such as displaying a button image, displaying a time meter, or displaying a meter M as an effect at the start of a button repeated press effect. ..
In this case, with respect to the button image to be displayed, one of the button image patterns may be selected from a plurality of button image patterns according to the degree of expectation of winning. As a result, it is possible to display a button image having the same shape but different colors and sizes.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button repeated press effect management process (FIG. 77).

[Processing during continuous button press production]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process during the execution of the button repeated pressing effect. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S880: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the button has been pressed. Whether or not the button is pressed can be confirmed by checking whether or not the contact signal from the push button 45a is input to the effect control device 124.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the button is pressed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S881. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the button has been pressed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S882.

Step S881: The effect control CPU 126 executes the button pressing process. Specifically, a process of determining the content of the effect to be executed when the push button 45a is pressed is executed.

Step S882: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not a lever input has been performed. Whether or not the lever is input can be confirmed by checking whether or not the contact signal from the lever member 45b is input to the effect control device 124.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the lever input has been performed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S883. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the lever input has been performed (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button repeated press effect management process (FIG. 77).

Step S883: The effect control CPU 126 executes the lever input process. Specifically, a process of determining the content of the effect to be executed when the lever member 45b is operated is executed.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button repeated press effect management process (FIG. 77).

[Button pressing process]
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the button pressing process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of calculating the current “maximum fluctuation value (MaxIndex)” of the index of the referenced scenario from the number of elapsed frames from the start of the effective time. The number of elapsed frames from the start of the effective time can be confirmed by counting the number of elapsed frames from the start of the effective time of the button repeated pressing effect.
The "maximum fluctuation value (MaxIndex)" is basically a value that is updated to a large value with the passage of time, although it depends on the referenced scenario.

For example, assuming that the referenced scenario is a successful scenario, if the "number of elapsed frames" is "60 frames", the "MaxIndex" is "4" and the "number of elapsed frames" is "120 frames". If, "MaxIndex" is "8" (see (A) in FIG. 84).

Step S9111: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not NowIndex <MaxIndex.
"Now Index" is a value indicating the current Index. "NowIndex" may be updated to a large value according to the pressing of the button.
"NowIndex" may be "NowIndex = MaxIndex" at the maximum. However, "NowIndex>MaxIndex" does not occur. That is, no matter how much the button is pressed, "NowIndex" does not exceed "MaxIndex".
"NowIndex" is the first variable that may be updated according to the operation input of the operating means, and "MaxIndex" is the second variable that may be updated according to the passage of time. is there.

Then, when it is confirmed that NowIndex <MaxIndex (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S912. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that NowIndex <MaxIndex (No), that is, when "NowIndex = MaxIndex", the effect control CPU 126 executes step S916.

The reason why step S912 is not executed when "NowIndex = MaxIndex" is that when "NowIndex = MaxIndex", the stage of the production has progressed to the maximum at the present time, so the step update lottery of step S912 This is to prevent the execution of.

Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the step update lottery has been won or whether or not the deviation between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number (for example, 6) or more. The step update lottery can be a lottery based on a predetermined winning probability (for example, a lottery that wins with a probability of 1/2 to 1/10 or the like).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the step update lottery is won or the difference between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number or more (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S913. On the other hand, when the step update lottery is won or when it cannot be confirmed that the deviation between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number or more (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S916.

Step S913: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of incrementing NowIndex (NowIndex + 1).

Step S914: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful. Whether or not the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful can be confirmed by whether or not the value of NowIndex is "15".

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 determines that the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful when the value of NowIndex is "15", and determines that the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful when the value of NowIndex is less than "15". It can be judged that the content of the scenario is not successful.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S915. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S916.

Step S915: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process at the time of success. Specifically, the process of selecting the effect pattern for displaying the character information of success on the meter M is executed while executing the effect of dropping the accessory.

Step S916: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process at the time of input (progress effect execution means). Specifically, a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing an effect at the time of input that is not a success is executed. As processing at the time of input, select an effect pattern that displays the effect corresponding to the button press (image of the ally character attacking, image of the fist at the top of the button image, etc.), or output the sound effect at the time of button input. Performs processing such as selecting the effect pattern to be performed.

In addition, when the stage of the production is switched (for example, when SU1 → SU2), the effect pattern of the progress effect that reduces the colored part of the meter value M is selected, or when the stage of the effect is not switched, the meter value. Select an effect pattern that maintains the colored part of M.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the process of executing the button repeated pressing effect (FIG. 80).

[Lever input processing]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the lever input process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S920: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of storing the fixed maximum value of the index of the reference scenario in the NowIndex. The fixed maximum value of the index of the reference scenario means the maximum value of the index of the reference scenario regardless of the number of frames elapsed from the start of the valid time. That is, the maximum fluctuation value (MaxIndex) fluctuates with the passage of time, but the fixed maximum value is fixed regardless of the passage of time.

For example, when the referenced scenario is a "success scenario", the fixed maximum value of Index of the reference scenario is "15" (see (A) in FIG. 84), so "15" is set for "NowIndex". Execute the process to store.
On the other hand, when the referenced scenario is a "failure scenario", the fixed maximum value of Index in the reference scenario is "14" (see (B) in FIG. 84), so "14" is used for "NowIndex". Execute the process to store.

Step S921: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful. The confirmation method is as described in step S914.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S922. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S923.

Step S922: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process at the time of success. Specifically, the process of selecting the effect pattern (the effect pattern of the special notification effect at the time of success) for displaying the character information of success on the meter M is executed while executing the effect of dropping the accessory.

Step S923: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process at the time of failure. Specifically, the effect pattern in which the enemy character flicks off the attack of the ally character and displays the character information of the failure on the meter M without executing the character fall effect (the effect of the special notification effect at the time of failure). Executes the process of selecting the pattern).
It should be noted that the effect pattern selected by the processing at the time of success or the processing at the time of failure can be continuously executed until the valid time ends (the same applies hereinafter).
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the process of executing the button repeated pressing effect (FIG. 80).

Then, by executing the processes of FIGS. 81 and 82, the effect control CPU 126 enables the progress effect to be executed when the push button 45a is operated, and when the lever member 45b is operated, the final button continuous effect effect. It is possible to execute a special notification effect for notifying a specific result (progress effect execution means).

[Processing at the end of repeated button press production]
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing at the end of the button repeated pressing effect. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S930: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the currently referenced scenario (reference scenario) is a successful scenario.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the reference scenario is a successful scenario (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S931. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the reference scenario is a successful scenario (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S932.

Step S931: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the process at the time of success has been executed. Whether or not the successful processing has been executed can be confirmed by setting the successful processing executed flag when the successful processing is executed. In addition, the flag for which the processing has been executed at the time of success can be reset at the end of the button repeated hitting effect, the end of the fluctuation, or the like.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the successful processing has been executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button repeated press effect management process (FIG. 77). On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the successful processing has been executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S933.

Step S932: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the process at the time of failure has been executed. Whether or not the failure process has been executed can be confirmed by setting the failure process execution flag when the failure process is executed. It should be noted that the failure processing executed flag can be reset at the end of the button repeated hitting effect, the end of the fluctuation, or the like.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the processing at the time of failure has been executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button repeated press effect management process (FIG. 77). On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the processing at the time of failure has been executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S934.

Step S933: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process at the time of success. Specifically, the process of selecting the effect pattern for displaying the character information of success on the meter M is executed while executing the effect of dropping the accessory.

Step S934: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process at the time of failure. Specifically, the effect of the enemy character flipping off the attack of the ally character is executed without executing the effect of dropping the character, and the process of selecting the effect pattern for displaying the character information of the failure on the meter M is executed.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button repeated press effect management process (FIG. 77).

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of a success scenario and a failure scenario of the button repeated hitting effect.
The effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the button repeated press effect while referring to the selected scenario.
Each scenario is composed of "number of frames", "scenario details", and "index" as information for managing the scenario.

"Number of frames" represents the elapsed time during the valid time. The effective time of the button repeated hitting effect (button effective time) starts from "number of frames = 0" and ends at "number of frames = 240".

"Scenario details" represents the stage of the production of the button repeated hitting production. "SU1" to "SU4" correspond to the first to fourth stages of the button repeated hitting effect, "success" corresponds to the final stage of the button repeated hitting effect, and "failure" corresponds to the button repeated hitting effect. It corresponds to the non-final stage of the production.

"Index" is an internal variable that manages the scenario. "Index" starts with "0", ends with "15" in the case of a success scenario, and ends with "14" in the case of a failure scenario.

In this way, in the button repeated hitting effect, the effective time starts from the time when the "number of frames" is "0" regardless of whether the success scenario is selected or the failure scenario is selected. The valid time ends when the "number of frames" is "240".

The effective time is the time during which the operation of the push button 45a and the lever member 45b is effective. Therefore, if the push button 45a or the lever member 45b is operated within the effective time (during the effective time) of the button continuous striking effect, the operation affects the content of the button continuous striking effect, but is outside the effective time (effective time). Even if the push button 45a or the lever member 45b is operated before the start or after the effective time ends), the operation does not affect the content of the button repeated striking effect.

[(A) Success scenario]
The details of the success scenario are as follows.
The "number of frames" is set every 15 frames from "0" to "240".
"Scenario details" include "SU1" to "SU4" and "success".
"Index" is set step by step from "0" to "15".

"SU1" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "0,15" in "Number of frames" and "0,1" in "Index".
"SU2" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "30 to 90" in "Number of frames" and "2 to 6" in "Index".
"SU3" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "105 to 150" in "Number of frames" and "7 to 10" in "Index".
"SU4" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "165-210" in "Number of frames" and "11-14" in "Index".
"Success" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "225,240" in "Number of frames" and "15" in "Index".

For example, in a situation where a success scenario is selected, if the "number of frames" is "15", the "MaxIndex" is "1". In this case, the button repeated hitting effect can proceed to "SU1". is there.

[(B) Failure scenario]
The details of the failure scenario are as follows.
The "number of frames" is set every 15 frames from "0" to "240". This is similar to the success scenario.
"Scenario details" include "SU1" to "SU4" and "failure".
"Index" is set step by step from "0" to "14". However, the last part of "Index" (on the right side in the figure) is "14" → "14", and in the failure scenario, "Index" does not shift to "15".

"SU1" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "0,15" in "Number of frames" and "0,1" in "Index".
"SU2" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "30 to 90" in "Number of frames" and "2 to 6" in "Index".
"SU3" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "105 to 150" in "Number of frames" and "7 to 10" in "Index".
"SU4" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "165-225" in "Number of frames" and "11-14 (two 14s)" in "Index".
"Failure" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "240" in "Number of frames".

For example, in the situation where the failure scenario is selected, when the "number of frames" is "165", the "MaxIndex" is "11". In this case, the button repeated hitting effect can proceed to "SU4". is there.
Note that these scenarios are just examples, and other scenarios may be prepared.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an operation image of a success scenario. When the success scenario is selected, the button repeated hitting effect is executed as the following effect mode.

[(A) Repeated hits]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a is continuously pressed from the start of the effective time. Further, in the step update lottery executed when the push button 45a is pressed, it is assumed that the player has won the lottery.

When the "number of frames" is "0,15", the "Index" is "0,1", so the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "30 to 90", the "index" is "2 to 6", so the "scenario details" is "SU2 (second stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "105 to 150", the "index" is "7 to 10" and the "scenario details" is "SU3 (third stage of button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "165 to 210", the "index" is "11 to 14" and the "scenario details" is "SU4 (fourth stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "225", the "index" is "15" and the "scenario details" is "success (the final stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", "Index" does not exist and the "scenario details" is "success".
Such a mode of progress of the effect is the first mode of progress at the time of success in advancing the stage of the effect of the button continuous striking effect one step at a time to the next stage according to the passage of the effective time.

[(B) Start pressing from 225 frame]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a is not pressed from the start of the effective time, and the push button 45a is repeatedly hit with the "number of frames" set to "225". Further, it is assumed that the step update lottery executed when the push button 45a is pressed has not been won.

In this case, when the "number of frames" is "0 to 210", the "index" is "0 to 14" and the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "225", the "index" is "15" and the "scenario details" is "SU2 (second stage of button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", "Index" does not exist, and the "scenario details" is "success (the final stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".
In such a mode of progress of the production, when the difference between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number or more, the stage of the production of the button repeated striking effect is advanced step by step to the next stage regardless of the elapse of the effective time. This is the second step of the above.

[(C) Lever input at 30 frames]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a is not pressed from the start of the effective time, and the lever member 45b is operated while the "number of frames" is "30".

In this case, when the "number of frames" is "0,15", the "Index" is "0,1" and the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "30 to 225", the "index" is "0 to 15" and the "scenario details" is "success (the final stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", "Index" does not exist and the "scenario details" is "success".
This mode of progress of the effect is the second mode of progress at the time of success in executing the special notification effect when the lever member is being operated.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an operation image of a failure scenario. When the failure scenario is selected, the button repeated hitting effect is executed as the following effect mode.

[(A) Repeated hits]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a is continuously pressed from the start of the effective time. Further, in the step update lottery executed when the push button 45a is pressed, it is assumed that the player has won the lottery.

In this case, when the "number of frames" is "0,15", the "Index" is "0,1" and the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "30 to 90", the "index" is "2 to 6" and the "scenario details" is "SU2 (second stage of button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "105 to 150", the "index" is "7 to 10" and the "scenario details" is "SU3 (third stage of button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "165-225", the "index" is "11-14" and the "scenario details" is "SU4 (fourth stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", "Index" does not exist, and the "scenario details" is "failure (non-final stage of button repeated hitting effect)".
Such a mode of progress of the effect is the first mode of progress at the time of failure in advancing the stage of the effect of the button continuous striking effect one step at a time to the next stage according to the passage of the effective time.

[(B) Start pressing from 225 frame]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a is not pressed from the start of the effective time, and the push button 45a is repeatedly hit with the "number of frames" set to "225". Further, it is assumed that the step update lottery executed when the push button 45a is pressed has not been won.

In this case, when the "number of frames" is "0 to 210", the "index" is "0 to 14" and the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "225", the "index" is "14" and the "scenario details" is "SU2 (second stage of button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", "Index" does not exist, and the "scenario details" is "failure (non-final stage of button repeated hitting effect)".
In such a mode of progress of the production, when the difference between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number or more, the stage of the production of the button repeated hitting production is advanced one step at a time to the next stage regardless of the elapse of the effective time. This is the second step of the above.

[(C) Lever input at 30 frames]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a is not pressed from the start of the effective time, and the lever member 45b is operated while the "number of frames" is "30".

In this case, when the "number of frames" is "0,15", the "Index" is "0,1" and the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "30 to 225", the "index" is "0 to 14" and the "scenario details" is "failure (non-final stage of button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", the "index" does not exist and the "scenario details" is "failure".
This mode of progress of the effect is the second mode of progress at the time of failure to execute the special notification effect when the lever member is being operated.

Then, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect mode of the button repeated press effect as shown in FIGS. 85 and 86 by monitoring the operation status of various operation means while referring to the above-mentioned success scenario and failure scenario. Can be done.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, the button depends on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied (whether or not the lever member 45b is operated and whether or not the deviation between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number or more). Since the progress of the continuous hitting effect is different, the variation of the production can be increased as compared with the method in which there is only one type of progress of the continuous hitting effect, and as a result, a novel playability is exhibited. be able to.

(2) According to the present embodiment, the content of the button repeated striking effect differs depending on whether the push button 45a or the lever member 45b is operated, so that the same effect can be obtained regardless of which operation means is operated. Compared with the method to be executed or the method in which only one of the operating means can be operated, the variation of the production can be increased, and as a result, a novel playability can be exhibited.

(3) According to the present embodiment, if the lever member 45b is operated during the execution of the button continuous striking effect, the final result of the button continuous striking effect is notified, so that the player quickly confirms the final result. can do.

(4) According to the present embodiment, the stage of the effect of the button repeated hitting effect is advanced one step at a time according to the passage of the effective time, or the effect of the button repeated hitting effect is produced regardless of the passage of the effective time. Since the stage of is advanced one step at a time to the next stage, regardless of how the effective time elapses, it is possible to surely advance the stage of the continuous button press production to the next stage one step at a time. As a result, it is possible to demonstrate a novel playability.

(5) In the present embodiment, if the push button 45a is pressed only once just before (immediately before) the effective time of the push button 45a ends, an effect almost equal to the final result can be seen. One issue is to avoid the situation. Further, if the player wants to know the final result in the middle of the button repeated hitting effect, the player has to press the push button 45a many times, and avoiding such a situation is also one of the problems. There is.

[Prerequisites]
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control device (effect control CPU) holds the index (index, stage of the effect content) of the pre-lottery scenario currently referred to, and the frame from the start of the button repeated press effect. The progress of the scenario is managed by determining the maximum fluctuation value (MaxIndex) of the index that can be referred to by the number.
In addition, it is determined by lottery whether or not to advance the current index (NowIndex) each time the push button 45a is pressed, and if it is not won, the current state is maintained (the value of NowIndex is maintained). There is.

Then, when such a control process is adopted, if the lottery for advancing the current index (NowIndex) is not continuously won, the scenario progresses even though the push button 45a is correctly pressed. A situation that does not occur will occur. Therefore, if the deviation between the current index (NowIncrement) and the maximum fluctuation value (MaxIndex) exceeds a certain number, the index is updated regardless of the lottery result until the deviation width becomes less than the specified range ( NowIndex is incremented). Further, by operating the lever member 45b, the current index (NowIndex) is forcibly advanced to the fixed maximum value regardless of such processing.

By adopting such a process, it is possible that the scenario does not proceed even though the push button 45a is correctly pressed. Further, if the push button 45a is pressed only once just before the effective time of the push button 45a ends, it is possible to prevent an effect almost equal to the final result from being seen. Further, a player who does not want to repeatedly hit or hold down the push button 45a can quickly confirm the final result of the button repeated hitting effect by operating the lever member 45b.

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of effect given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of effect described above.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, but the present invention may be applied to a so-called type 1 game machine (a game machine not provided with a specific area).
The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation function, and in this case, it can also be applied to a so-called loop type gaming machine (a type in which a substantial upper limit is not set for the number of probability variations). It can also be applied to ST type gaming machines (a type that sets a substantial upper limit on the number of probability changes).
Further, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation region, or can be applied to a gaming machine having no probability variation region.
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a game machine that does not adopt "simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol", and can also be applied to a game machine that adopts simultaneous rotation. ..

In the above-described embodiment, the example of the game machine including the 7-segment display device 200 has been described, but the game machine may not have the 7-segment display device 200.
Further, the 7-segment display device 200 may be changed to a drum unit (for example, a device having three rows of reels) or a liquid crystal display.

The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine equipped with a setting changing device.
The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine equipped with a performance display monitor.

Although the stepwise effect has been described in the example of the button continuous press effect, it may be a button long press effect.
Although the stepwise effect has been described in the example of being executed during the fluctuation, it may be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game.
Although the stepwise effect has been described in the example of being executed during the reach effect, it may be executed in a scene other than the reach effect (for example, during the execution of the advance notice effect).
The stepwise effect has been described as an example of an effect in which the meter value decreases, but it may be an effect in which the meter value increases.

The stepwise effect may be an effect that does not use a meter. In this case, for example, it is possible to execute an effect of increasing or decreasing a predetermined effect element.
The stepwise effect may be an effect executed by the auto button function (a function in which the push button is assumed to be pressed even if the player does not press the push button).

In the above-described embodiment, the first operating means is the push button 45a and the second operating means is the lever member 45b. However, the first operating means is the lever member 45b and the second operating means is the push button. Button 45a may be used.
The predetermined condition may be a condition that is satisfied when a predetermined lottery for the production is won, a lottery for whether or not to execute the progress production according to the second progress mode is won, and the like.

The above-described embodiment can be modified as follows.
(1) When the lever input to the lever member 45b is detected, the button pressing process may be invalidated (not executed) thereafter.
(2) The effective time start timing of the button input for the push button 45a and the effective time start timing of the lever input for the lever member 45b may be different. In this case, the effective time start timing of the lever input to the lever member 45b may be effective when a predetermined frame (predetermined time) has elapsed from the effective time start timing of the button input to the push button 45a.

(3) When executing a scenario in which the operation effective time is short (the effect with a short effect time, the effect of about several seconds), the lever input to the lever member 45b may be invalidated from the beginning. That is, it may have a scenario pattern (effect pattern) that does not accept lever input but accepts only button input.
(4) As for the progress effect executing means, the game state in which the game state is advantageous (high probability state or time reduction state) satisfies the predetermined conditions as compared with the normal state (low probability state or non-time reduction state). It may be easier to do. Further, as the progress effect executing means, the predetermined condition is satisfied in the gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous (high probability state or time shortening state) as compared with the normal state (low probability state or non-time reduction state). You may make it difficult.

The present invention is applicable not only to pachinko machines but also to slot machines.
In this case, the first operating means can be a push button and the second operating means can be a bet button.

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately deformed.

[Embodiment B]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 87 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 88 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of balls. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88.

[Overall configuration of the game machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side thereof when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 provides fasteners such as screws to island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 88) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 87. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 87, with the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 closed to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the amusement park inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above-mentioned game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 above behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the plate receiving unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It is paid out to the plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. Although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is given as an example of a model connected to the card unit, it may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the card unit).

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can push the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example, to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game ball is received in, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the grip unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 to launch (drive) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 so as to be connected below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (without reference numeral).

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, emitting light from the built-in LED (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, the outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, and the like (general sound) to execute the effect.

Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 is, for example, a form in which a push-type circular button and a rotary joggling (jog dial) are combined around the push-type circular button. By pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), or perform some effect (for example, during a pattern change or a big hit game). It is possible to generate a notice effect, a probabilistic promotion effect, a promotion effect during a major role, etc.).

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 88, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. In addition to various units such as the back cover unit 178, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown)) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, and a power cord (power plug). 164, ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed. The electronic devices will be described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 93).

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 140 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 140 is arranged in the main control device so that the pachinko machine 1 can be seen in the upper left region of the main control board unit 170 when viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located at the lower right of the seven segments. Has been done. The performance display monitor 140 is visible through a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a setting key keyhole 306. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing RAM, that is, initializing the RAM (RWM) installed in the main control unit, and in the present embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. Will be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing or referencing a game-related setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. Further, the keyhole 306 for the setting key is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is still sealed.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 140, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 shown in FIG. 88 are merely examples, and can be arranged at any position. Further, the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without a reference symbol), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, the game balls replenished from the replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the above-mentioned external terminal plate 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal plate 160, a game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island equipment of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Construction of board]
FIG. 89 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. Further, in the game area 8a, a medium start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device are placed around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed. Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is located in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. In the right side portion (so-called right-handed area) of the game area 8a, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top. Has been done.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of its flow down, enters (wins) the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 25, or opens. The ball enters the variable start winning device 28 at the time, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. The game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20, enters the normal winning opening 25, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation, or enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation. There is a possibility of entering the first variable winning device 30 or entering the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. The game balls that have entered the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22, 25, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are the game boards (combined game board units 8). It is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in a plate material, a transparent plate, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a hit manner), and accordingly, the variable start winning device 28 enters the right starting winning opening 28b. Enables a ball (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members 28a, and these opening / closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a solenoid (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 89, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the right starting winning opening 28b (the game ball enters the ball). There is no gap that can be created). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is activated, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position to the open position, respectively, and the opening width is expanded to the left and right to open the right start winning opening 28b. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the game ball can be entered, and the right starting winning opening 28b can be generated (variable starting winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28a also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the right starting winning opening 28b. Further, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b when opened). However, the game ball does not always enter the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b) at the time of the opening operation, and the winning balls occur randomly.

Further, the variable start winning device 28 is a predetermined condition that is difficult to be satisfied in the non-time shortened state (predetermined gaming state), and is more likely to be satisfied in the time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) than in the non-time shortened state. If the operating condition (the condition that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode and the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time) is not satisfied, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b. On the other hand, when the predetermined operating conditions are satisfied, the state shifts to the easy entry state, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b, rather than the difficult entry state. The variable start winning device 28 opens the short (opens for 0.1 seconds) when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode in the non-time shortened state, and stops and displays the normal symbol in the winning mode in the time shortened state. If this is the case, it will be opened for a long time (open for 1.0 to 6.0 seconds).

The first variable winning device 30 operates when the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, or when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game). , It is possible to enter the ball into the first large winning opening 30b (special electric accessory, special winning event generating means). The first variable winning device 30 has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position to the open position by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the ball into the first prize opening 30b (the first prize opening 30b is closed). Is. When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to collapse to the right with the lower end edge portion thereof as a hinge, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the game ball can flow in, and the event of entering the first large winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the first winning opening 30b. The arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b at the time of operation). However, the game ball does not always enter the first variable winning device 30 at the time of operation, and the winning balls occur randomly.

The second variable winning device 31 operates when a special condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit), and enables the ball to enter the second large winning opening 31b (). Special electric accessory, second special prize event generation means). The second variable winning device 31 may be operated when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged on the right side of the effect unit 40, and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The first variable winning device 30 employs a type of device (single-bladed tulip-type attacker) in which the opening / closing member 30a collapses to the right, whereas the second variable winning device 31 has the opening / closing member 31a. A type of device that slides inside the board is used (sliding attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. It is difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not difficult, and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

[Specific area]
Further, a specific area 31x is provided inside the second variable winning device 31. The specific area 31x is an area in which the game ball is difficult to pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the specific area slide member 31c is in the open state when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. This is the area through which the game ball can pass when it is pulled into the inside of the board. The details of the second variable winning device 31 will be described later.

Further, although not particularly shown, the second variable winning device 31 (opening / closing member 31a) may be formed with a game ball rolling speed reducing portion that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball. The game ball rolling speed reduction portion makes the inclination of the opening / closing member 31a gentle, or forms alternately protruding protrusions on the opening / closing member 31a at a position where the game ball passes in a zigzag manner. This can be achieved. As a result, many game balls can be entered into the second variable winning device 31 during the small hit game.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not won a prize are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. In addition, the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 25, the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b), the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b), the second variable winning device 31 ( All the game balls driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 31b, the specific area), are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

90 and 91 are diagrams showing details of the second variable winning device 31.
In the second variable winning device 31, the second large winning opening 31b is arranged below the sliding opening / closing member 31a. The inside of the second prize opening 31b has a downward slope to the left, and a passage extends downward at the left end. A second count switch 85 is arranged in the passage extending downward, and the second count switch 85 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31.

Then, the passage extending downward is divided into two routes beyond that. One first passage 31d extends downward as it is, and the other second passage 31e branches to the left.
A slide member 31c for a specific area is arranged in the first passage 31d, and a specific area 31x is arranged downstream of the first passage 31d. A specific area switch (not shown) is arranged inside the specific area 31x.
On the other hand, no special member is arranged in the second passage 31e, and a discharge hole 31y is arranged downstream of the second passage 31e.

The slide member 31c for a specific area operates when a special condition is satisfied (after the lapse of the first time and before the lapse of the second time after the operation of the second variable winning device 31), and the slide member 31c for the specific area is moved to the specific area 31x. Allows the passage of game balls. The specific region slide member 31c slides along the front-rear direction of the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a specific region solenoid (not shown). For example, after the lapse of the first time, 0.2 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated, and after the lapse of the second time, 1.8 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated. After the lapse of time.

When the specific region solenoid is in the OFF state, the slide member 31c for the specific region blocks the first passage 31d, so that it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific region 31x. On the other hand, when the specific region solenoid is turned on, the specific region slide member 31c is pulled inside the board surface, so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific region 31x.

Next, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 90 (A), the slide-type opening / closing member 31a is pulled inside the board surface, and the game ball enters the second large winning opening 31b. In the illustrated example, four game balls are advancing toward the second winning opening 31b. Here, it is a state immediately before the first game ball is detected by the second count switch 85.

As shown in FIG. 90 (B), the first game ball has reached the slide member 31c for a specific area. The second and third game balls are advancing toward the second count switch 85. The fourth game ball is about to enter the second big winning opening 31b.

As shown in FIG. 90 (C), at this time, the slide member 31c for a specific area is not pulled inward (because it is not operating), so that the first game ball is a slide for a specific area. The traveling direction is changed to the left by the member 31c, and the vehicle travels in the second passage 31e. In this case, the first game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

As shown in FIG. 91 (D), it is assumed that the slide member 31c for a specific area is pulled inside the board surface at this point (during operation). In this case, the second game ball passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific area and proceeds to the first passage 31d. Then, the second game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 91 (E), the third game ball also passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific region and proceeds to the first passage 31d. In this case, the third game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 91 (F), it is assumed that the operation of the specific area slide member 31c is completed at this point, and the specific area slide member 31c protrudes to the front side of the board surface. In this case, the fourth game ball is guided to the left by the slide member 31c for a specific area and proceeds to the second passage 31e. Then, the fourth game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

FIG. 92 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a).
The game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 (normal symbol display means) and a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a at a lower right position in the window 4a, and a first special symbol display device 34 (first special symbol display device 34). 1 symbol display means), a second special symbol display device 35 (second symbol display means), a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and turns on or off the lamps to stop and display the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The individual is displayed, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after increasing one by one in the sense that each time the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the passage that triggers the operation lottery occurs. Then (up to 4), each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started with the passage as a trigger, the display mode is changed by 1 each. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display, for example, a floating state and a stopped state of the special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means, first). Symbol display means, second symbol display means). In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers depending on a display mode composed of, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs) (memory number display means). ). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking of one lamp, and three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. It displays 4 pieces, and so on.

On the other hand, the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a displays one storage number by, for example, a display mode composed of a combination of turning off or turning on one lamp (LED) (memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned off, the number of stored items is 0, and in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a changes to the display mode after increasing one by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the above-mentioned middle start winning opening 26, the occurrence of the entry is memorized. Every time the special symbol starts to change with the ball entering (up to 4), the display mode is changed by 1 each. In addition, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a shifts to the increased display mode in the sense that when a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b), the ball has been entered. When the special symbol changes (up to 1) and the special symbol starts to change when the ball enters, the display mode changes to the reduced display mode. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of stored symbols is 0), the first special symbol (first symbol) is in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed). Even if the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26, the display mode does not change. Further, when the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is not lit (the number of stored symbols is 0), the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the second special symbol (second symbol) can already start fluctuating (when the stop is displayed). Even if the game ball enters the (right start winning opening 28b), the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (maximum 4 or maximum 1) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation memory lamps 34a and 35a has not yet started to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol at that time. It represents the number of times the ball has not entered.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, six LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation display lamp 38f, respectively. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Other configurations of the game board: see FIG. 89]
The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed in the upper part of the inside of the effect unit 40, and the liquid crystal display 42 includes an effect symbol (this symbol) corresponding to a special symbol, a fourth symbol, and the like. Various production images are displayed, including a storage marker (hold display). As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface (the design of the cell board (not shown)) and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40.

Further, a drum unit 200 is installed in the lower part inside the effect unit 40.
The drum unit 200 includes a left reel 201, a middle reel 202, and a right reel 203, and pseudo-effect symbols (7 symbols, panda symbols, cherry symbols, etc.) are displayed on each reel. For example, when seven symbols of the same color are displayed on the middle line, which is the effective line, it indicates that a big hit result has been obtained in the special symbol lottery. Each reel of the drum unit 200 is a movable body that can be moved at a plurality of moving speeds.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d is connected to the lower rolling stage 40e through the back side of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll freely in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. ..

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) (not shown) is attached to the inside of the upper center of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f (for example, a heart-shaped decoration) for effect. The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By such an effect using the movable body 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted, and the main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76 are integrated. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Of these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for a big hit determination of a special symbol lottery or a hit determination of a normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main control device 70 includes a RAM clear switch 304 used for initializing the RAM 76, an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and peripheral ICs such as a counter / timer circuit (CTC). Are equipped, and these are mounted on the circuit board together with the main control CPU 72. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or inner layer portion).

Further, the main control device 70 is provided with a setting changing device 300 and a setting key switch 302. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes the setting by operating the setting changing device 300. The setting changing device 300 is a device for switching the setting (at least the setting related to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery), and is operated by operating the RAM clear switch 304 or the like provided in the pachinko machine 1. Further, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Further, the operation probability means the probability that the combination of special symbols that the condition device is activated (the jackpot game is executed) is displayed. The setting key switch 302 is an input device that inputs a signal (ON / OFF) indicating the rotation state as the setting key, which is indispensable for switching the setting, rotates. Various methods can be adopted for changing the setting, and for example, the setting can be changed by the following procedure.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, open the door of the pachinko machine 1 with the dedicated key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) Since the setting key keyhole 306 for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304 are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key is inserted into the setting key keyhole 306 for setting. Rotate the key to the right.
(4) Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

Here, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting is changed. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be referred to.

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times in a state where the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to any one of a plurality of predetermined stages. Further, the set value can be displayed on, for example, a dedicated 7-segment LED, a game state display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.), and a performance display monitor 140.

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the desired setting is reached, the lever ON process is required, but since the pachinko machine 1 does not have a lever, an alternative process (for example, the setting key is left) instead of the lever ON process. The process of rotating in the direction, the process of turning on the setting change confirmation button (not shown, etc.) may be executed, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In the present embodiment, when the target setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to the original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to the original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) Then, when the change of the setting is confirmed, the setting key can be extracted from the setting key keyhole 306. Further, when the setting change is confirmed and the set value is displayed on the dedicated 7-segment LED, the game status display device 38, and the performance display monitor 140, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, close the door of the pachinko machine 1. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, the normal game starts.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU 72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76. The setting value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

In this case, the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed to change the setting to any stage, but the RAM clear switch 304 is not used for changing the setting, and a dedicated setting change switch is separately provided. May be good. In this case, in the above procedure (6), the separately provided setting change switch is pressed an arbitrary number of times.

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of the game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 has a middle start winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening corresponding to the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84 and a second count switch 85 are provided. The starting winning opening switches 80 and 82 are for detecting the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b). Further, the count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b) and counting the number of winning balls. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second variable winning device 31 (the second major winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof.

In addition, a specific area switch 83 is provided corresponding to the specific area 31x. A specific area switch 83 is provided at a position corresponding to the specific area 31x inside the second special winning opening 31b, and the specific area switch 83 detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball into the ordinary winning openings 22 and 25. Here, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used for all the ordinary winning opening 22 and 25 is given as an example. For example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the winning opening on the left side is used. The switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the normal winning openings 22 and 25 located on the left side of the board, and the right winning opening switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the ordinary winning openings 25 located on the right side of the board. May be.

In any case, the winning detection signal and the passing detection signal of these switches 80, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the winning detection signal and the passing detection signal from the gate switch 78, the specific area switch 83, the count switch 84, and the winning port switch 86 pass through the panel relay terminal plate 87. The panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and the integrated display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 by relaying the panel relay terminal board 87.

Further, a performance display monitor 140 is connected to the main control device 70 via a panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 140 indicates the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening), and indicates the number of game balls fired into the game area. It is a monitor for displaying a base calculated by dividing by a number (the number of game balls detected by the out switch 141). The base is calculated for each section preset using an area (unused area) different from the used area used for controlling the progress of the game, and the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are , It is displayed by switching at preset intervals. The display operation of the performance display monitor 140 is controlled based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 140 according to the calculation status of the base, and controls the lighting state of each of the 7 segments.

Although the performance display monitor 140 is described in the example of connecting to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87, the performance display monitor 140 may be connected to the main control device 70 without passing through the panel relay terminal plate 87. , The performance display monitor 140 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main control device 70.

Further, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, a normal electric accessory solenoid 88, and a first large winning opening solenoid corresponding to the specific area 31x, respectively. 90, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 and the specific area solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and are the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x, respectively. To open and close. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and a control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, the glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and the plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (means for granting special benefits). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and the payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When each prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the above-mentioned flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with the game balls, the more paid out game balls are released. As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above. Among them, the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in 1 minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Will be sent to. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118, and when the above card unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120, the same firing is performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 contains a frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the card unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the card unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not inserted into the card unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which the effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a semiconductor memory such as a RAM (RWM) 130 or an eRAM 131 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position covered by the back cover unit 178.

In addition, the effect control device 124 is equipped with various functional components necessary for realizing the effect such as VDP152, driver IC132, and audio IC134. Of these, the VDP 152 is a processor for drawing an effect screen reproduced on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The driver IC 132 is equipped with an IC that controls devices such as lamps 46 to 52, board lamp 53, and movable motor 57. Further, the voice IC 134 controls the output from the speakers 54, 55, 56. The internal configuration of the effect control device 124 will be described in detail later with reference to another figure.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). The serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of.

In the present embodiment, the sub-connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the driver IC 132 and the voice IC 134 pass through the sub-connection board 136 to various lamps 46 to 52 and the speakers 54, 55. It is applied to 56. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned effect switching button 45 and jog dial 45a, a volume adjustment switch (not shown) is connected to the sub-connection board 136, and when the player operates these operating members, their contact signals are sub-connected. It is input to the effect control device 124 through the substrate 136. Although an example in which each operation member is connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given here, each operation member may be connected to the saucer illumination board when the above-mentioned saucer illumination board is installed.

In addition, a driver board 138 is installed on the game board unit 8, and a board lamp 53, a movable body motor 57, and a movable body sensor 58 are connected to the driver board 138. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). The movable body sensor 58 is, for example, a photo sensor provided at the origin position (initial position) of the movable body 40f, and outputs a detection signal when the movable body 40f is detected. The drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable motor 57 via the driver board 138, respectively. The movable motor 57 may be a solenoid.

[Drum unit]
A drum unit 200 is connected to the driver board 138.
The drum unit 200 includes a left reel 201, a middle reel 202, and a right reel 203 arranged coaxially.
The left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 are each formed in an annular shape, and a reel band having a plurality of pseudo-effect symbols attached in a row at intervals is wound around the left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203, respectively. .. The left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 have a rotation axis at the center thereof, and can be rotated or reversed about the rotation axis.

Further, the drum unit 200 is provided with a stepping motor (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a motor) (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a motor) corresponding to each reel and a position detection mechanism (not shown) corresponding to each reel. The position detection mechanism may be arranged inside the stepping motor or may be arranged outside the stepping motor. The position detection mechanism can be configured by, for example, a light-shielding plate and a photo sensor.

The stepping motor is driven by a drum unit control device (driver, IC) (not shown) that controls the drum unit 200. The drum unit control device drives each reel according to the movable body data transmitted from the effect control device 124. Further, the drum unit control device transmits a detection signal to the effect control device 124 via the driver board 138 in response to the detection of the position (for example, the origin position) of each reel detected by the position detection mechanism.

Then, the effect control device 124 generates movable body data to be transmitted to the stepping motor corresponding to each reel based on the detection signal transmitted from the drum unit control device, and controls the operation of each reel.

The stepping motor is a motor that drives each reel (movable body) (1-2 phase excitation drive) by alternately repeating 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation, and the stepping motor has four coils (coils 1 to 1). Coil 4) is included.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the card unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The above-mentioned external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to the outside from. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal plate 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is given as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal plate 160.

[Internal configuration of production control device]
FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing an internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124.
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a role as an effect control processor that controls the effect as the game progresses. Therefore, in addition to the effect control CPU 126, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188, which are necessary for the effect control device 124 to function as the effect control processor. The control ROM 180 stores basic programs, tables, and the like related to the control of the effect. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect by accessing the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and executing a program stored in the control ROM 180. The watchdog timer IC188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is normally performed (whether the process is completed within the estimated time), and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU 126. There is. If the signal (clear pulse) for clearing the monitoring timer of the watchdog timer IC188 is not input within a predetermined time, the watchdog timer IC188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for resetting and activating the effect control CPU 126. To do. As a result, the effect control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

In addition to these, the effect control device 124 has SRAM 182, which is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real-time clock (RTC) 184 that manages time. , SRAM 182, a lithium battery 186 that supplies backup power to the real-time clock 184, peripheral ICs such as an input / output driver and a counter / timer circuit (not shown) are provided. The lithium battery 186 stores the electric power and charges itself while the driving electric power is being supplied from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124. The SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 are connected to the lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the supply of the driving power from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 continue to operate for a period until the lithium battery 186 is depleted (for example, about one and a half months). The SRAM 182 can retain the stored information for a while even when the power is turned off.

The effect control program is configured to store information on security, monitoring, defects, and the like that should not be easily erased in the SRAM 182. As a result, for example, when some trouble occurs in the effect control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 is collected (or inspected in the installed state), and the information held in the SRAM 182 is analyzed to proceed with the investigation of the cause of the trouble. It becomes possible.

By the way, by controlling the effect executed by the effect control CPU 126 according to the program stored in the control ROM 180, the operation of devices such as the liquid crystal display 42, various lamps 46 to 53, and the speakers 54, 55, 56 is finally performed. Is controlled. The flow of this effect control can be roughly divided into two stages, "overall control (reproduction instruction)" and "individual control (reproduction control)". The effect control CPU 126 first receives an effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce the effect according to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the effect control CPU 126 generates instruction data obtained by converting the instruction content into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and relays between the effect control CPU 126 and each device. Send to (individual control). As a result, each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and the pachinko machine 1 uses each device for effect reproduction (screen display, voice output, lamp emission, movable body operation). Etc.) is realized.

As described above, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stage of the effect control, and these functions are realized as a plurality of tasks in which the resources of the effect control CPU 126 are properly used. In FIG. 94, the tasks corresponding to the individual functions executed by the effect control CPU 126 are the effect control unit 210, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the movable body control unit 226, and the input control unit. It is shown as 228, Time Management Department (ACT) 230 and the like. In the following description, it is assumed that each task is treated as an operation subject of the effect control process.

First, at the stage of overall control, the effect control unit 210 in the effect control CPU 126 becomes the main operator, and the time management unit (ACT) 230 that manages the time progress of the effect controls the flow of the entire effect. Further, in the stage of individual control, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the movable body control unit 226, or the input control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 are the main operators according to the device to be controlled. It becomes. The effect control unit 210 may be configured to directly control the control devices 134, 152, 198, 199 and the like.

The effect control device 124 functions as an effect control processor at the stage of overall control, whereas it functions as an effect reproduction processor at the stage of individual control. Therefore, the effect control device 124 further includes a CGROM (image / audio ROM) 190, a VDP 152 (effect display control board) for controlling various devices used for reproducing the effect, an audio IC 134, an LED driver 198, and an SMC. (Serial control controller) 199 and driver IC 132 are equipped.

The CGROM 190 stores the drawing material (moving image data) constituting the effect screen and the audio material (audio data) output as the effect progresses in a state of being compressed by a predetermined compression algorithm. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the voice IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

The VDP152 is a processor dedicated to drawing an effect image, and is integrated into one chip together with the effect control CPU 126. Further, the VDP 152 has a built-in VRAM 156 and a drawing material decoder 157. Of these, the VRAM 156 is mainly used when developing the drawing material, and the drawing material decoder 157 is used when decompressing (decoding) the drawn drawing material in a compressed state. The VDP 152 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the display control unit 220, reads out the necessary drawing material from the CG ROM 190 via the CG bus, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Then, the read drawing material is decoded by the drawing material decoder 157, the effect image is drawn on the VRAM 156, and the effect image is expanded in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). By individually driving each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the image data buffered here, the reproduction of the effect screen is realized.

The voice IC 134 is a sound generator that generates sound effects such as sound effects and BGM that are reproduced during the execution of the production, and is integrated with the production control CPU 126 and one chip like the VDP 152. The audio IC 134 is connected to an amplifier (not shown), an external DRAM, or a CG bus. Further, the audio IC 134 has a built-in audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) the compressed audio material. The voice IC 134 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the voice control unit 222, and reads out the necessary voice material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus. Then, the read audio material is decoded on the external DRAM using the audio material decoder 135. By outputting the decoded audio to various speakers via an amplifier, stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch audio reproduction (may be a larger number of channels) is realized. Further, the voice IC 134 adjusts the output volume of various speakers based on the contact signal input when the volume adjustment switch is operated.

The LED driver 198 controls a lighting pattern and a brightness pattern associated with the execution of the effects of various lamps provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In the LED driver 198, an address designation synchronous serial system is adopted. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the lamp control unit 224, and transfers the drive data corresponding to the control to the driver IC 132.

The SMC 199 controls the drive pattern of the motor that is the drive source of various movable bodies for the effect provided inside the effect unit 40, and relays the detection signal output by the sensor for the movable body to control the movable body. Hand over to department 226. The SMC 199 is also integrated with the effect control CPU 126 in one chip. In SMC199, a clock synchronous serial system is adopted. When driving the movable body, the SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern of the motor for the movable body based on the instruction content transmitted from the movable body control unit 226, and transfers this to the driver IC 132. Although the SMC 199 is used only for generating the drive pattern of the motor here, since the SMC 199 can generate not only the motor but also the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern of the lamp, the SMC 199 is applied instead of the LED driver 198 described above. However, it is also possible that the SMC 199 is configured to generate data patterns for both lamps and motors.

The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamp and the motor based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 and the SMC 199. The driver IC 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps and movable motors to manage their operation. By doing so, it is possible to realize a directing reproduction using a lamp or a movable body. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a light source built in each part of the operation unit 60 and decoration / directing installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 of the above is included. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built in the effect unit 40, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like.

In addition to this, the driver IC 132 transfers the contact signal input when the operating member such as the effect switching button 45 or the jog dial 45a is operated by the player to the effect control unit 210 via the input control unit 228. The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the effect content to be reproduced based on the content of the transferred contact signal.

The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or by clearing the backup information. It is a process for. Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

95 and 96 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector interrupt mode (mode 2), and modifies the default RST interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, after that, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the designated interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a reset standby process here. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checking the main power cutoff detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power supply disconnection detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power supply cutoff detection signal is input from, for example, a power supply monitoring IC which is a peripheral device. Then, if the input of the main power supply cutoff detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. Thereby, for example, it is possible to protect the system when the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S105: Further, the mask register is initially set in order to set the main control CPU 72 and the interrupt mask. Specifically, the value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch saved earlier, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is then executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup valid determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power cutoff process and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all the work areas (user work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup valid determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Further, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurs.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a return command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, an operation memory number increase effect command, an operation memory number decrease effect command, and a number of times cut) to the effect control device 124. Counter command, special game status specification command, etc.) are sent. In response to this, the effect control device 124 receives the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the acoustic output content, and various lamps) that were being executed when the power was cut off last time. The light emitting state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes the state return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state (for example, the display mode of the special symbol, the internal probability state, etc.) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs the initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command required for the effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of the prize ball to the payout control device 92.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes the CTC initial setting process and performs the initial setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector register and sets the interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the backed up program address of the PC register.

When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 96 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes a power failure occurrence check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power supply cutoff detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power supply cutoff (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, when the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the grand prize opening solenoid 90, etc., the entire work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid judgment flag and the thumb check buffer. Back up the contents of and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup valid determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops the process (NOP). On the other hand, if the power cutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU is made to execute such a process when a power failure occurs as an non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments the random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers other than the jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol (for example, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc.) Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 100), but the initial values of the loop counter (all) are updated every time the random number value makes a round in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S120 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 100), so that there is duplication (conflict) with this. ) To prevent. As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is even faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number.

Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed with the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 100). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the second procedure of the reset start process. Note that duplicate description will be omitted for the same processing as in the first procedure example of the reset start processing. Further, the process of FIG. 96 is the same in the first procedure example and the second procedure example.

The second procedure example of the reset start process is different from the first procedure example of the reset start process in that the preparatory process (step S112a) is added.

Specifically, if it is determined to be affirmative (Yes) in step S106, if it is determined to be negative (No) in step S107, or if it is determined to be negative (No) in step S108, the process under preparation (Step S112a) is executed.
The execution timing of the preparatory process (step S112a) is not limited to such a timing, and can be executed at any timing in the reset start process. That is, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed, it suffices to be controlled so as to shift from "preparing" to "playable state (shifted to the main loop)".

Step S112a: In the preparatory process, the main control CPU 72 controls various operations required when clearing the RAM. The details of the processing will be described later.
Then, when the preparatory process (step S112a) is completed, the main control CPU 72 executes the RAM clear process (step S113). The subsequent processing is the same as the processing of the first procedure example.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process in preparation.
Step S125: The main control CPU 72 executes the preparing operation control process. Details of the operation control process during preparation will be described later.

Step S126: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch is operated (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the reset start process (FIG. 97). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch is being operated (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the process of step S125.
By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can continue to execute the operation control process during preparation in step S126 until the RAM clear switch is pressed.

[Preparing operation control process]
The details of the operation contents of the operation control process during preparation are as follows.
The main control CPU 72 can execute the process of adopting at least one state and operation among the following states and operation contents in the preparation operation control process.

(1) During preparation, the state shifts when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed. During the preparation, it stays until the RAM clear switch is pressed again. When the RAM clear switch is pressed in the "preparing" state, the game shifts to the "playable state".

(2) During preparation, the movable body (movable body connected to the main control device 70) managed by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) is movably controlled, and whether or not the movable body operates normally. You can check the movement.
Specifically, a special electric accessory (attacker), a movable body inside the special electric accessory (a movable body that opens a probability variation area or a specific area, a rotating body that constantly rotates in the case of a two-type system, and a specified trigger. The movable body that can be moved by the above, the mechanism, solenoid, motor, etc. associated with them) and the ordinary electric accessory (electric tulip) are movably controlled by a constant operation.
The movable control is executed, for example, by operating a solenoid or a motor according to a movable pattern in which "0.4 seconds ON → 0.4 seconds OFF" is repeated a plurality of times.
The movable control may be continuously executed from the beginning to the end during preparation, or may be executed up to a predetermined number of times or a predetermined time.

(3) During preparation, it is possible to make it clear from the outside that preparation is in progress. In this case, for example, information such as "preparing", "cannot play", "finished when the RAM clear switch is pressed", "change the effect setting by pressing the effect button", etc. can be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display. it can. In this case, the audio output such as "Preparing" may be repeatedly executed at the same time.

(4) During the preparation, the setting related to the effect may be changed by operating the effect button. For example, when the effect switching button (effect button) is pressed, the display screen of the liquid crystal display is switched, and the date and time setting, volume setting (1 to 5 steps), effect frequency setting (1 to 3 steps), effect type setting, etc. are selected. Can be made possible.

(5) During the preparation, the launch control of the game ball may be disabled. This is because the launch control board 108 can launch the game ball on condition that the "launch permission signal" is transmitted from the main control device 70 to the payout control device 92. The main control device 70 can perform a process of transmitting a "launch permission signal" in the "interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)", but the "interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)" is being performed during preparation. Since it is a period that has not been executed yet, it will be in a state where it cannot be fired.

(6) The program for the process being prepared (the program for operating various movable bodies) can be implemented (arranged) in the used area. The used area is an area in which the capacity that can be used to control the progress of the game is defined by the game machine rules, and the area outside the area is an area that is not included in the calculation of the usable capacity.

(7) During the period of preparation, external information indicating that preparation may be made may be output to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.).

(8) The preparation is in the stage before shifting to the main loop (before the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) is executed). Therefore, during the preparation, the display (main segment) of the integrated display board 89 can be turned off. Further, during the preparation, it is possible not to determine an error that can be determined during the playable state (for example, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, a large winning opening illegal winning error, etc.). Furthermore, during the preparation, it is possible to prevent the payout of prize balls, the fluctuation of special symbols, and the fluctuation of ordinary symbols.

(9) When the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed, a command indicating "preparing" can be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device. Further, when the RAM clear switch is pressed again and the preparation is finished, a command indicating "preparing finished" can be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device. In this case, a command may be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device before shifting to the main loop.
At the stage of preparation, the RAM clear process is not executed, and the RAM clear process can be executed on condition that the RAM clear switch is pressed during the preparation. However, after executing the RAM clear process, the transition may be made during preparation, and then the transition to the main loop may be performed.

The background to adopting such a configuration has the following problems.
In conventional game machines, the operation of special electric accessories and ordinary electric accessories cannot be confirmed at any time (especially when the power is turned on when clearing RAM), so problems suddenly occur during normal games. It may be discovered.

Then, by adopting the above configuration, the following effects can be exhibited.
(1) Since it is possible to confirm whether or not the various electric accessories can operate when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the problem that the various electric accessories do not operate during the game and to play the game normally.
(2) Since the game can be played normally, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is interrupted, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.
(3) Since the problem can be solved in advance (before the game), the process of confirming the problem during the game can be eliminated, and it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the processing load on the control.
(4) Since the effect setting can be executed during the preparation (operation check), it is possible to provide an efficient game.

The following technical contents can be extracted from the above configuration.
(1) When the power is turned on while the predetermined operating member (RAM clear switch), the movable body (electric accessory, drive source, solenoid, motor, etc.) and the predetermined operating member are being operated. It is a gaming machine provided with a movable body operating means for operating the movable body in a constant motion pattern in order to confirm whether or not the movable body operates normally.
(2) In the configuration of the above (1), it is preferable that the movable body operating means continues to operate the movable body in a constant operation pattern until the predetermined operating member is operated again.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 99 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of the procedure for the power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is continuously output, for example.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port, and confirms whether or not the main power supply disconnection detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, the main power supply disconnection detection switch is mounted on, for example, the main control device 70, and the main power supply disconnection detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162 and determines the voltage level. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, a main power failure detection signal is output. The main power supply disconnection detection switch may be built in the power supply control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power supply cutoff detection signal has not been output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-counter value set in the previous step S130 is subtracted by, for example, 1, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not 0 (No) at this point, the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the test signal terminal and the output port buffer corresponding to the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the grand prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters the standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (not shown), so that the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power supply is cut off. Retained without doing. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the main power supply is cut off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 95).

[Interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)]
Next, the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the interrupt management process. The main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L pairs) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described above.

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes the input process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input / output (I / O) ports 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86, and the specific area switch 83. Reads the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the specific area switch 83. The event that occurred during the game is determined based on the passage detection signal from the player, and another process is executed according to the event that occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using a further flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery trigger, first lottery trigger, second lottery trigger) has occurred. Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among them, in the special symbol game processing (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the first special symbol display device 34 and the first. 2 The variable display and the stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special symbol game processing will be described later using a further flowchart.

Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (ordinary symbol lottery execution means). When the random value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 fluctuates the normal symbol to display the stop display of the normal symbol in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is activated by excitation (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in an out-of-order manner after the fluctuation display.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. In this process, a prize ball instruction for instructing the payout control device 92 of the number of prize balls based on the prize detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203). Output the command.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls to be obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the conditions are met, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, start port) to the hall computer (external device) of the amusement park through the external terminal plate 160. Information etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer.

In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a vessel or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time. Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, time shortening function operating). And store these in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. It controls the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the special symbol game processing (step S205) and the normal symbol game processing (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc.) is performed.

Step S211: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 port outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). Further, the main control CPU 72 is a drive signal and a test signal of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the specific area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer. Etc. and output to the port.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command required for effect control) in the command buffer, and if there is an untransmitted command, the command to be output is output. Output to port.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in the CTC interrupt this time.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 are executed as timer interrupt processes is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores the value (01H) for specifying the interrupt end in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After that, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer). In the interrupt management process, the main control CPU 72 determines various errors (magnetic error, radio wave error, vibration error, large winning opening illegal winning error, etc.) based on sensors and switches (not shown) that detect various errors. can do.

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 100). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the right-starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game (during the small hit game). On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S24. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S24: The main control CPU 72 executes the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol operation memories is less than the upper limit (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit, acquires a random number per normal symbol. To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the number of normal symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the passage detection signal is input from the specific area switch 83 corresponding to the specific area 31x in the second special winning opening 31b. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 to execute a process of turning on the specific area reserve flag. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 100).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 101). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into five sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section contains a jackpot determined random number and a jackpot symbol random number. Can be stored as a set (set) one by one. However, only four sections can be used for the first special symbol, and only one section can be used for the second special symbol. Therefore, even if there is a vacancy in the section, if four sections are already used for the first special symbol, each random number of the first special symbol is not stored any more. Similarly, even if there is a vacancy in the section, if one section is already used for the second special symbol, each random number of the second special symbol is not stored any more. The reason why there are five sections is that a total number of sections is required, which is the sum of the maximum storage number (4) of the first special symbol and the maximum storage number (1) of the second special symbol. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol reaches the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 101). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 100).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random numbers related to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). Means, lottery element acquisition means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. These random numbers are stored as a set in an empty section in the area (first lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fifth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fifth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fifth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: When the case is not during the jackpot (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the special symbol lottery and the fluctuation time are preliminarily (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively. This is for determining the content of the production (so-called "look-ahead"). In this process, the result of the pre-determination of the first special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command (look-ahead information).

Step S38: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower bytes of the special figure destination determination effect command (information on whether or not the command is correct or information on the fluctuation time) are set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper bytes are combined with the lower bytes here. By doing so, for example, a command with a length of one word will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the number of working memories this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the number of working memories "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. In this process, the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 ( Memory number notification means).

When the above procedure is completed or the number of first special symbol operation memories has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 101).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 101). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 1) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 101). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 102), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 100) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 102) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 102) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element). Acquisition means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 102) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and these are transferred to the random number storage area. Random numbers are stored as a set in an empty section in the area (second lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 102) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the jackpot (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judging. In this process, the result of the preliminary determination of the second special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command.

Step S47: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, in this case as well, the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46). Therefore, here, for example, one word length is obtained by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte. Command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". it can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, regarding the second special symbol, a special figure destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect command, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like are transmitted to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means). When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 101).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 102, step S46 in FIG. 103) (preliminary determination). Means, look-ahead processing execution means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process related to the first special symbol or the process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random number value. The random number to be loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 102) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 103). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, advance determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command (look-ahead information) for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-reach variation (non-reduction variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if it exists. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not operating (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of small hit, in the same manner as the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 102) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 103). On the other hand, in the determination in step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 102) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 103). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and it is determined from the result which winning symbol corresponds to. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S78.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, the special symbol destination judgment value is set to "00H" when it corresponds to "a symbol that does not shift to the time reduction state", and "01H" when it corresponds to "a symbol that shifts to the time reduction state". .. In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 102) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 103).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 100) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game processing. The special symbol game process includes execution selection process (step S1000), special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), special symbol change process (step S3000), special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and variable winning device management process. (Step S5000) is a configuration including a group of subroutines (program modules). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variation display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is changing. If the processing is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the processing during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU performs each process as a whole, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol.

Step S4000: In the process during special symbol stop display, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and a stop display of a special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit or small hit mode (a mode other than the non-winning mode) in the previous special symbol stop display processing. The big hit game or the small hit game is started according to the mode in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Big hit game]
For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a 10-round jackpot, a jackpot game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the first large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, for 29 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times). The first variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable prize device 30, the player is given an opportunity to collectively obtain a large number of prize balls (special game execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a big hit is referred to as "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 10 times in total, these may be collectively referred to as "10 rounds". In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the 10-round jackpot. In addition to the 10-round jackpot, other jackpots may be provided as the type of jackpot.

Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the opening / closing of the first variable winning device 30 for one round. The value of the round count counter is incremented by 1 each time the operation is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command indicating the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 100). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) only for that round.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (time shortened state) after the jackpot game is completed based on the game status flag (time reduction function operation flag) (time reduction state transition means). In the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the lottery probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is set from the normal probability (low probability) to the high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the variable start prize is won. The opening time of the device 28 is extended and the number of times of opening is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed). It should be noted that a game machine including elements of a so-called type 2 game machine (for example, a type 1 type 2 type mixer or a type 2 game machine, that is, a big hit game is executed by passing a game ball through a specific area during a small hit game. In the game machine), the winning probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbol may not be shifted to the high probability state. In this case, the winning probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is a fixed probability (for example, approximately 1/1) regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is activated, and the open pattern of the variable start winning device 28 makes it easy to win. Difficulty can be adjusted.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When the small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game execution means). For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, a small hit game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 operates for a certain period of time (for example, for 1.8 seconds or until 10 prizes are counted) for a preset number of operations (for example, once or for a plurality of times). It is excited, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (operation of a special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to obtain a certain amount of prize balls (special game execution means).

Further, in the variable winning device management process during the small hit game, the specific region solenoid 99 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) for a preset number of operations (for example, once), thereby for the specific region. The slide member 31c opens and closes in a fixed pattern. By passing the game ball through the specific area 31x during this period, the player is given an opportunity to start the big hit game. That is, whether or not the big hit game is started in the variable winning device management process is determined depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game. In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the small hit, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, the big hit game according to the winning type is started.

Further, even if the small hit game ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 31x, the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state" is not given (hence). It is not a prerequisite for.) If a small hit is won in the "time reduction state", the "time reduction state" may end after the small hit game ends.

[Multiple winning types]
In this embodiment, "10 round jackpots 1 to 6" are provided as a plurality of winning types. "10 round big hits 1 to 4" are started when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode, and "10 round big hits 5 and 6" are stopped and displayed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode. It is started when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the hit game. When the big hit is executed by "10 round big hits 5 and 6" (when the big hit is executed via the small hit), the second variable winning device 31 operates in the first round, and the first round in the remaining rounds. The variable winning device 30 operates.

The above-mentioned winning types correspond to the types of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that are stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "10 round jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of the "first winning symbol", and "10 round jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of the "second winning symbol". Further, "10 round jackpot 3" corresponds to the jackpot of the "third winning symbol", and "10 round jackpot 4" corresponds to the jackpot of the "fourth winning symbol". Furthermore, "10 round big hit 5" corresponds to a small hit of "5th winning symbol" (big hit when passing through a specific area 31x), and "10 round big hit 6" corresponds to a small hit of "6th winning symbol" (specific area). It corresponds to the big hit when passing 31x). Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[1st winning symbol]
In the process during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "first winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "first winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In addition, when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round, the first large winning opening 30b is closed without waiting for the lapse of the longest opening time (hereinafter, the same applies). .. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[2nd winning symbol]
In the process during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "second winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "second winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, the "time saving function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

[Third winning design]
When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "third winning symbol" in the processing during the special symbol stop display, the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "third winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[4th winning symbol]
When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fourth winning symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "fourth winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, the "time saving function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

[5th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fifth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "fifth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player nine rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[6th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "sixth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "sixth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player nine rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, the "time saving function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol", the "third winning symbol" or the "fifth winning symbol" is applicable, there is a possibility of shifting to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game is completed. ..

In this way, a small hit is won by an internal lottery, and when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game is executed, and after the big hit game is completed, the time is shortened according to the type of the winning symbol. The gaming machine is a so-called one-kind two-kind mixed type gaming machine.

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demo effect command. The demo effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 100). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 in the order of acquisition. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. In the present embodiment, random numbers are read out in the order stored (acquired) in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 (winning order digestion). It should be noted that the control of priority digestion that prioritizes the digestion of the second special symbol may be used instead of the control of the winning order digestion for each special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol that shifts the random number) stored in the RAM 76. The latter value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 100), the display mode of the number of stored numbers by the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is changed (decreased by 1). .. After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol change preprocessing, when the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than "0" (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 106), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 refers to the random number storage area and confirms whether or not the oldest storage corresponds to the second special symbol. This confirmation can be realized by confirming whether or not the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the first section of the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if it is confirmed that the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates a second special symbol as the target special symbol. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol (step S2210: No), that is, when the oldest memory corresponds to the first special symbol, the main The control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the target special symbol. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation storage counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target special symbol this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the "working memory number at the start of fluctuation" may be set after adding the values of the working memory counters.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the target special symbol is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target special symbol is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word length command, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the reduction, with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ”) Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logically) with an additional value (for example,“ 10H ”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption”. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The above-mentioned preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: When the target special symbol this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation memory number reduction effect command set in step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 106).

[See FIG. 106: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution). means). If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

When the above jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (first). Lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The "small hit" here is something other than non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the above-mentioned "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. The "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating only the second variable winning device 31 (the condition for operating the condition device is not satisfied). Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the "small hit", it is positioned to develop into a "big hit" (the condition for operating the condition device is satisfied). In any case, if the read random number value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random number value.

In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the big hit is set to 1/319, and the winning of the small hit is not set. In the first special symbol lottery, a small hit may be won. Further, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a big hit is set to 1/319, the probability of winning a small hit is set to 318/319 (= approximately 1/1), and it corresponds to a loss. It is designed not to. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, it may correspond to the loss. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit. In order to satisfy these jackpot winning probabilities and small hit winning probabilities, the jackpot value range and the small hit value range are set by the main control CPU 72 and compared with the read random number values.

Further, the main control CPU 72 has a second special symbol lottery opportunity (second lottery opportunity) that is less likely to occur than the first special symbol lottery opportunity (first lottery opportunity) in the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state). When the occurrence occurs, the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) is executed (second lottery execution means).

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 100).

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be set, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to a variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) (not shown), and executes a variation pattern determination process at the time of disconnection (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display. Fluctuation patterns include various fluctuation patterns such as normal fluctuation (non-reach fluctuation), reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc. (the same applies to large hits and small hits). It should be noted that the information regarding the fluctuation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a fluctuation pattern command including the information as to whether or not it is a special fluctuation (the same applies to the case of a big hit or the time of a small hit). ).

Here, since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is in the above-mentioned "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and the current state is "time reduction". Check if it is in "state". Further, even if it is not in the "time reduction state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the fluctuation for executing the reach effect is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of the variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of the variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of the variable display). 2 pieces → about 5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display 3 pieces → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is missed (when other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). , The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type determining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, four types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the first special symbol is "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol", and the breakdown of the second special symbol is "third winning symbol" or "fourth winning symbol". In addition, each winning symbol of these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "first winning symbol", "first winning symbol A", "first winning symbol B", "first winning symbol C", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are shown in the left column, and the distribution values "52" and "48" are the ratios when the denominator is 100. Equivalent to. Further, in the second column from the left, the "first winning symbol" and the "second winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "first winning symbol" is 52/100 (= 52%), and the ratio of selecting the "second winning symbol" is 100. It is 48 minutes (= 48%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Selectively determine the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value. Among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte means that the winning symbol this time is selected at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H" and "02H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol and the "first winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". It will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the stop symbol selection table at the time of the first special symbol jackpot, the main control CPU 72 generates the stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
In the column on the right side of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown. In the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 1 (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time is normal (non-time reduction state) or time reduction (time reduction state). ) Granted.

In addition, in the case of corresponding to the "second winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving. The number of time reductions is not limited to the above value, and may be 2 times or more (11 times or more).

Here, "1 time (or 10 times)" means time when the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 1 or the total number of fluctuations of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is 10. It means that the shortened state ends.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. .. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "third winning symbol" and the "fourth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "third winning symbol" is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting the "fourth winning symbol" is 100. It is 50 minutes (= 50%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT value "01H" of the lower byte represents the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol and the "third winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described by "B2H01H". ..

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
The value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game is shown in the right column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. In the present embodiment, when the "third winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is given once (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time reduction is normal or time reduction.

In addition, in the case of corresponding to the "fourth winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving.

[See FIG. 106: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the jackpot variation pattern determining process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit. In this process, when the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is the "first winning symbol" or the "third winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 is set in the flag area of the RAM 76. The time reduction function operation flag as a certain game state flag is set to ON (01H) (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operation means).

By executing such a process, when the main control CPU 72 wins the winning symbol that shifts to the time saving state (when a special condition is satisfied), the main control CPU 72 starts from the non-time saving state (first state) a plurality of times. It is possible to shift to a continuous villa state (a state in which the second special symbol can be changed in a time shortened state and a non-time shortened state: a second state, a special state) in which the special game can be executed (state transition means). ).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit is defined in advance in the small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, but a dedicated random number may be used separately. Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit is not set for the first special symbol, but is set only for the second special symbol.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In this embodiment, two types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a small hit. The breakdown of the two types is "5th winning symbol" and "6th winning symbol". In addition, these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "fifth winning symbol", "fifth winning symbol A", "fifth winning symbol B", "fifth winning symbol C", and so on.

[Second special symbol stop symbol selection table at small hit]
FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Even in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are shown in the left column, and the distribution values "50" and "50" are when the denominator is 100. Corresponds to the ratio of. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "fifth winning symbol" and the "sixth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a small hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "fifth winning symbol" is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting the "sixth winning symbol". Is 50/100 (= 50%).

As a result of this small hit, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selectively determines the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table also defines, for example, 2-byte command data as a stop symbol command at the time of winning, as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is a small hit of the second special symbol. It shows that it is a thing. Further, the EVENT values "03H" and "04H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the "fifth winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol as a result of the small hit this time, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H03H".

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the stop symbol number at the time of small hit for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started, and the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game is given. The value of is shown. In the present embodiment, when the "fifth winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is given once (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time reduction is normal or time reduction.

In addition, in the case of corresponding to the "sixth winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving.

By using the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, and the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 is in a non-time shortened state or If the time is shortened and the "1st winning symbol", "3rd winning symbol" or "5th winning symbol" is applicable (the 5th winning symbol is limited to the case where the jackpot game is executed), the time. It can be assumed that the transition condition to the shortened state is satisfied (transition condition setting means).

[See FIG. 106: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the small hit time variation pattern determining process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the small hit is set only for the second special symbol lottery, and at the time of the small hit, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time for the small hit is selected. A small hit may be set in the first special symbol lottery.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 105: Processing during special symbol change, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol change processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the change timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer is changed according to the passage of time (the count number of clock pulses or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement the value of the counter. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 106). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the stopped symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag.

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing during special symbol stop display. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 105) in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display processing.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the time saving function is not activated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the normal state (non-time reduction state) is entered.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed except at the time of big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. Then, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and it is simply out of alignment (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number update process. In this process, if both the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol are 0, no process is executed. On the other hand, when the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol is 1 or more and the first special symbol is stopped, the process of decrementing (-1) the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol is executed. Further, when the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is 1 or more and the second special symbol is stopped, the process of decrementing (-1) the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is executed. The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol are reset at the start of the jackpot game. When this process is executed regardless of whether the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol or the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is 0 or 1 or more, the main control CPU 72 causes the first special symbol. It is possible to send a special variation number designation command that reflects the value of the special variation number of the second special symbol and the special variation number of the second special symbol to the effect control device.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number-cutting counter. In the "count cut counter", the counter value related to the "time reduction state" is set in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76. In this embodiment, a so-called time reduction function for cutting the number of times is adopted, and when shifting to the "time reduction state", the first number of times cutting counter value (total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) related to the time reduction state is adopted. The time reduction number of times is set to a predetermined value (for example, 10 times), and the second time reduction counter value (time reduction number of times of the second special symbol) related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, once). The information of the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value is notified (transmitted) to the effect control device 124 by the count cut counter command.
The time reduction counter value related to the time reduction state is not provided with two counter values such as the first number cut counter value and the second number cut counter value, and the time reduction state is controlled by only one counter value. May be good.

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value (first count cut counter value or second count cut counter value) is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, if the number-of-count counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value. Specifically, when the stop display of the second special symbol is being displayed, both the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value are decremented, and when the stop display of the first special symbol is being displayed. Decrements only the first count cut counter value.

Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result of any of the number-cutting counter values (first number-cutting counter value or second number-cutting counter value) is 0. As a result of the subtraction, if none of the counter values for cutting the number of times is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when any of the number-cutting counter values is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number-cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, the number-of-times counter value related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, once or 10 times). When the second special symbol missed variation (including the small hit variation at that time when the specific area is not passed) is executed in the time shortened state, the time shortening function operation flag is reset. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol is displaced 9 times in the time-reduced state, the time-saving function activation flag is not reset, and then the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed once in the time-reduced state. When the out-of-order fluctuation is executed, the time saving function activation flag is reset. As a result, the time reduction state ends after the stop display of the special symbol is displayed. The time reduction function activation flag is described in the example of resetting when the stop display time of the special symbol has elapsed, but even if it is reset at the end of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (before the stop display time measurement starts). Good.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game processing.

In this way, the end condition (predetermined end condition) of the time shortened state is when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the time shortened state reaches the first number (for example, once), or When the total number of fluctuations, which is the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the time reduction state, reaches the second number (for example, 10 times), which is larger than the first number. It is a condition that is satisfied.

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of a display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 100) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special as already described. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the time saving state display lamp 38e according to the value of the time saving function operation flag. For example, if a value (01H) is set in the time saving function operation flag when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 sets the time saving status indicator lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. A lighting signal is output to the corresponding LED. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 sends a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f. Output. Further, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 also emits a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f in addition to the time saving state display lamp 38e described above. Is output. When the launch position designation display lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game, it lights up from the start of the jackpot game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. (OFF).

The time shortened state can be ended at the end of the fluctuation (at the start of the stop display time) of the final fluctuation (missing fluctuation, small hit fluctuation or big hit fluctuation) in the time shortened state. In this case, the stop display time of the final fluctuation in the time shortened state can be set to a time (15.0 seconds) longer than the stop display time (0.5 seconds) other than the final fluctuation. The time reduction state may be terminated at the end of the stop display time of the final fluctuation in the time reduction state.

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any of the jackpot type indicator lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any of the indicator lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing "10 rounds (10R)". Further, in the present embodiment, there is no jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, but as a jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, for example, a 4-round jackpot exists, and the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "4 rounds". If so, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "4 rounds (4R)". In addition, as in this embodiment, when there is only one type of jackpot as a jackpot (when there is only a 10-round jackpot), it is not necessary to turn on the jackpot type indicator lamp.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a list of fluctuation pattern tables.
The variation pattern table includes seven variation pattern tables A to G.
The main control CPU 72 makes it possible to select any one of the seven variation pattern tables A to G according to the gaming state. Each variation pattern table contains one or more variation patterns. For example, when the variation pattern table A is selected, the variation pattern selected may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. This point is the same for other fluctuation pattern tables. The "game state" in the figure indicates the game state (game state of the transition destination) after the end of the big hit game. However, the "game state" in the figure may be the game state before the start of the big hit game (the game state before the transition).

The variation pattern table A is selected when the gaming state is "no time reduction (non-time reduction state)". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state. This table is selected even after the RAM is cleared.

The variation pattern table B is selected when the game state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state. The difference between the fluctuation pattern table A and the fluctuation pattern table B is that the fluctuation pattern table B is a table that is selected within the specified number of fluctuations (for example, up to 30 fluctuations) after the time reduction state ends. .. The variation pattern table B is a so-called immediate shaving prevention table.

The variation pattern table C is selected when the game state is "time reduction available (time reduction state)". Specifically, when the first special symbol fluctuates from 1 to 4, 6 to 9 at the time of winning a symbol with a time reduction in the normal state (when the "1st winning symbol" or "3rd winning symbol" is won). Be selected. In this table, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (for example, 1-second fluctuation) is set for the first special symbol, and a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, 120-second fluctuation) is set for the second special symbol. Is set.

The variation pattern table D is selected when the gaming state is "with time reduction". Specifically, it is selected in the time saving state. In this table, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 90 seconds) is set for the first special symbol.

The variation pattern table E is selected when the game state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state (1 time remaining = when the second special symbol fluctuates by one variation after the end of the time reduction state). In this table, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 120 seconds) is set for the second special symbol.

The variation pattern table F is selected when the game state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected at the time of the final fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern table B.

The variation pattern table G is selected when the game state is "with time reduction". Specifically, it is selected when the first special symbol fluctuates by 5 or 10 when the symbol with a time reduction in the normal state is won. In this table, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 13.5 seconds) is set for the first special symbol.

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state.
Here, the "time reduction number" in the figure indicates a value to be set in the first number cut counter value (the total time reduction number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (the same applies to FIG. 115).

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is the "first winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 4" and "6 to 9", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table C".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "5" or "10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table G".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "10 times". Therefore, the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "10 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0". "Times", and "Number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" becomes "0 times". , "The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "20 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0 times". , And the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state.
In this embodiment, since a big hit or a small hit occurs when the second special symbol changes, there is no special change table after the second change.
Here, the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" in the figure indicates a value to be set in the second number cut counter value (the time reduction number of only the second special symbol) (the same applies to FIG. 116).

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is "1st winning symbol (1st special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)", "2nd special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and "2nd special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table C".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "second special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and the "second special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" Is "1 time", and "the number of special fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction" The "number of times" is "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" is It becomes "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" becomes "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number of times" Is "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortened state.

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is the "first winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "10 times". Therefore, the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "10 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0". "Times", and "Number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" becomes "0 times". , "The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "20 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0 times". , And the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortened state.
As in FIG. 114, in the present embodiment, a big hit or a small hit occurs when the second special symbol changes, so that there is no special change table after the second change.

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is "1st winning symbol (1st special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)", "2nd special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and "2nd special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "second special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and the "second special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" Is "1 time", and "the number of special fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction" The "number of times" is "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" is It becomes "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" becomes "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number of times" Is "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

By adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state) and before the jackpot game is executed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (second state) (For example, 1 second) can be made relatively shorter than the fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state) (variation time determining means). ..

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state), and after the jackpot game is executed, the second state of the consecutive villa state (second state). It is possible to make the fluctuation time of one special symbol (for example, 120 seconds or more) relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (for example, less than 120 seconds) in the non-time shortened state (first state) (for example, less than 120 seconds). Fluctuation time determination means).

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 wins in the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) and shifts to the continuous villa state, and the fluctuation time (variation) of the first special symbol The pattern table D) should be made relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (variation pattern table C) when the first special symbol lottery (first lottery) is won and the state shifts to the continuous villa state. It is possible (means for determining fluctuation time).

By adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state) and before the jackpot game is executed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (second state) The fluctuation time can be determined so that the fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state). Time determination means).

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state), and after the jackpot game is executed, the second state of the consecutive villa state (second state). The fluctuation time is determined so that the fluctuation time of one special symbol (for example, 120 seconds or more) is relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state) (for example, less than 120 seconds). It is possible (means for determining fluctuation time).

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 wins in the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) and shifts to the continuous villa state, and the fluctuation time (variation) of the first special symbol The pattern table D) is made to be relatively longer than the fluctuation time (variation pattern table C) of the first special symbol when the first special symbol lottery (first lottery) is won and the state shifts to the continuous villa state. The fluctuation time can be determined (variation time determination means).

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes the game process selection process (step S5100), the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300), the large winning opening closing process (step S5400), and the end. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern as the next jump destination (step). Select S5200). On the other hand, if the large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the large winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the large winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process and the large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects the end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. .. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are opened and closed at the time of a big hit or a small hit, and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. As a result of this confirmation, when the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5203. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), that is, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5204.

Step S5203: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the winning symbol at the time of big hit is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of small hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5205: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, and the "accessory continuous actuating device" is the first variable winning device 30 or the second. It is a device that can continuously operate the variable winning device 31. The "conditional device" and the "continuous operation device for accessories" can also be used as control flags. Therefore, unless this condition device is operating, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate in the big hit game. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5212.

Step S5212: The main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol, a value representing "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5214.

Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol at the time of a big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol related to the special symbol. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of execution rounds, the opening time, and the interval time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5216.

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit]
FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of a big hit. This open pattern setting table for each big hit symbol defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 30 or second variable winning device 31) that is operated for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol. Is. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[1st winning symbol]
When the first winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the first winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened (however, it is closed when the maximum number of winning balls is confirmed. The same shall apply hereinafter). Therefore, if the ball corresponds to the first winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[2nd winning symbol]
When the second winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the second winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if the second winning symbol is applicable, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[Third winning design]
When the third winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the third winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if the third winning symbol is applicable, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[4th winning symbol]
When the fourth winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the fourth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if the ball corresponds to the 4th winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol by referring to the opening pattern setting table for each big hit symbol.

[Refer to Fig. 120: Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
Step S5216: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated for each round (1st round to the final round) during the jackpot game to the 1st variable winning device 30 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. To do. In addition, in this embodiment, since the opening pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit is the first round to the final round, the first big winning opening 30b is opened. The operation of the first variable winning device 30 is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5218.

Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. For example, 10 rounds are set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the 10-land jackpot. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5220.

Step S5220: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for a round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the release timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5222.

Step S5222: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first winning opening 30b between the first round and the second round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5224.

Step S5224: The main control CPU 72 generates a command for the number of continuous operations. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5218). For example, in the case of corresponding to the first winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 119).

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5252: The main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit game in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5254.

Step S5254: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit opening pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table at the time of small hit and selects the opening pattern. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of times of opening, the opening time, the interval time, and the opening time of the specific area 31x. ing. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5256.

[Open pattern setting table for small hits]
FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. This small hit opening pattern setting table defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (second variable winning device 31). In the present embodiment, one open pattern is set at the time of a small hit, but a plurality of open patterns may be specified for each winning symbol.

When it corresponds to a small hit, the variable winning device to be operated is the second variable winning device 31. The number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened is two, and the opening time of one time is 0.9 seconds. The interval time is set to, for example, about 1.0 second.

The opening start time of the specific region 31x (timing at which the specific region solenoid 99 is turned on to operate the specific region slide member 31c) is 0.2 seconds after the opening start of the second variable winning device 31.
Further, the opening end time of the specific area 31x (the timing at which the specific area solenoid 99 is turned off to deactivate the specific area slide member 31c) is 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. ..

[See FIG. 122: Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
Step S5256: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the second variable winning device 31. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated during the small hit game in the second variable winning device 31 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5258.

Step S5258: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening to be executed during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, two times are set as the number of times the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit is opened. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5260.

Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the large winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, 0.9 seconds is set based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5262.

Step S5262: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the standby time (interval timer) between the opening of the large winning openings based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, the interval timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5264.

Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets an release timer for the specific area 31x (specific area slide member 31c). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) of the specific area 31x during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In the present embodiment, the specific area 31x is opened 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x is closed 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. Will be done.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 119).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current internal state is “important”. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer of the RAM 76, and the current internal state is "in the big hit game" depending on whether or not the "big win (big hit game)" flag is set as the internal state flag for control. Check if it is "in a big role". The flag of "during big hit (during big hit game)" is set by the main control CPU 72 during the previous process (during the process of setting the big winning opening pattern at the time of big hit: step S5212) and during the process when passing through a specific area described later. .. As a result of this confirmation, when the current internal state is "Major role" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5306. On the other hand, when the current internal state is not "Major role" (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the second variable winning device 31 to open and close the second winning opening 31b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the second winning opening solenoid 97). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S5306: The main control CPU 72 executes the first large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the first variable winning device 30 to open and close the first winning opening 30b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the first winning opening solenoid 90). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 118).

[2nd prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second prize opening opening / closing operation processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5310: The main control CPU 72 opens the second special winning opening 31b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the release timer set in the previous process (step S5260 or step S5264 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 122)). In this process, in addition to the opening timer for opening the second special winning opening 31b, a countdown for the opening timer (opening start time, opening end time) for opening the specific area 31x is performed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5314.

Step S5314: The main control CPU 72 executes the specific area opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the slide member 31c for the specific area in order to open and close the specific area 31x based on the set opening pattern (outputs a drive signal applied to the specific area solenoid 99). Perform processing. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5316.

Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the second large winning opening 31b during the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. On the other hand, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second variable winning device 31 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5320.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed per opening at the time of a small hit (the upper limit of the number of winning balls). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps of steps S5310 to S5320 described above.

When it is determined in step S5316 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5320 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. Since the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds) for the release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally indicates that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5316 that the opening time has ended before the confirmation.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 closes the second grand prize opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5324.

Step S5324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76, and confirms whether or not the specific area passing flag is ON depending on whether or not the value of the specific area passing flag is 01H. As a result of this confirmation, when the specific area passage flag is ON (Yes), that is, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main The control CPU 72 then executes step S5326. On the other hand, when the specific area passage flag is not ON (No), that is, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main control The CPU 72 then executes step S5327a. The specific area passage flag may be set to ON in the specific area opening / closing operation process (step S5314).

Step S5326: The main control CPU 72 executes the process when passing through the specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open. , The process of continuously operating the first variable winning device 30, that is, the process of starting the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means via special game, special game execution means). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5327a: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the previous process (step S5262 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 122)). Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5327b. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5327a for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 118). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5327a is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5310.

Step S5327b: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter. The value of the second large winning opening opening count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5327c: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of, for example, "the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times during one small hit". Is. In particular, when such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round, so that the counter value is set by one opening / closing operation. Since the set number of times is reached (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5328.

On the other hand, when the opening pattern of "opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small hit" is adopted, the counter value has still reached the set number of times at the end of one opening. There will be no (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5310 to S5327b are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the opening count counter progresses in step S5327b, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (step S5327c; Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5328: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 124). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Specific area opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5330: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has been started. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer for the release start time for opening the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, thereby confirming whether or not the value of the release timer is 0. Check if the 31x opening time has started. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is started (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5332. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not been started (No), or if it has already been opened, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5332: The main control CPU 72 opens the specific area 31x. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is output. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific area operates, and the specific area 31x shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5334: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area 31x. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the storage area of the RAM 76 and confirms whether or not the specific area reserve flag is ON. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is ON and the game ball has passed the specific area 31x (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5336. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is OFF and the game ball has not passed through the specific area 31x (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338.

Step S5336: The main control CPU 72 sets the specific area passage flag to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and sets the value of the specific area passage flag to 01H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338. The specific area passage flag and the specific area reserve flag are reset at the end of the big hit game.

Step S5338: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has expired. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer related to the release of the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, so that the release time of the specific area 31x is Check if it is finished. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x ends (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5340. On the other hand, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 125).

Step S5340: The main control CPU 72 closes the specific area 31x. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is stopped. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific region returns from the open state (operating state) to the closed state (non-operating state).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 125).

[Processing when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when passing through a specific area. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5350: The main control CPU 72 resets the small hit flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and resets the value of the small hit flag to 00H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5352.

Step S5352: The main control CPU 72 ends the small hit game. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 erases "small hit game in progress" from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game on the control process (small hit end). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5354.

Step S5354: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 can be continuously operated, and the big hit game can be started. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5356.

Step S5356: The main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the winning symbol. For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol, a value representing "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5358.

Step S5358: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol when passing through the specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol when a small hit is applied. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5360.

Step S5360: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 is a variable winning device that operates every round (2 rounds to the final round) during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. The type is set to the first variable winning device 30. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5362.

Step S5362: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. For example, "10 rounds" is set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the fifth winning symbol. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5364.

Step S5364: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (4th winning symbol to 6th winning symbol) related to the special symbol when the small hit is applied. For example, in the case of the fourth winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for a round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the release timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5366.

Step S5366: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In this embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to the winning symbol when the small hit is hit. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first winning opening 30b between the second round and the third round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5368.

Step S5368: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5362). For example, in the case of corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5370.

Step S5370: The main control CPU 72 executes a time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through a specific area. In this process, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the "fifth winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the time reduction function operation flag to ON (time reduction state transition means, time reduction). Function operating means).

By executing such a process, when the main control CPU 72 wins the winning symbol that shifts to the time saving state (when a special condition is satisfied), the main control CPU 72 starts from the non-time saving state (first state) a plurality of times. It is possible to shift to a continuous villa state (a state in which the second special symbol can be changed in a time shortened state and a non-time shortened state: a second state) in which a jackpot game (special game) can be executed (state transition means). ).

Step S5372: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol according to the winning symbol. Specific numerical values of the number of special fluctuations are as described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 116.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the address at the end of the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 125).

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. The open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the first variable winning device 30 for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[5th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. The number of execution rounds is 10. Since the number of execution rounds includes the operation of the second variable winning device 31 opened by a small hit, in the big hit game to be started from now on, 9 rounds in which 1 round is subtracted from 10 rounds are included. This is the actual number of rounds in the jackpot game (the same applies to the 6th winning symbol below). Then, in each round, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the fifth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first large winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the fifth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to obtain substantially nine rounds of balls.

[6th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10 (the number of rounds in a substantial jackpot game is 9). Then, in each round, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the sixth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first large winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the 6th winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to substantially obtain 9 rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the large winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit, with reference to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area. Will be done.

[First prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the first special winning opening. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5380: The main control CPU 72 opens the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5382.

Step S5382: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5220 of the big hit opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 120) or step S5364 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 127)). Executes the countdown of the release timer. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5386.

Step S5386: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the first large winning opening 30b after the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. On the other hand, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5388.

Step S5388: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 30 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5390.

Step S5390: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during the big hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the above steps S5380 to S5390.

If it is determined in step S5386 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5390 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. When the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the main control CPU 72 usually steps before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5390. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended in S5386.

Step S5392: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5394.

Step S5394: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5222 of the jackpot opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 120) or step S5366 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 127)). Executes the countdown of the interval timer. Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5395. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5394 for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 118). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5394 is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5380.

Step S5395: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5396: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is, for example, in order to correspond to the opening pattern of "opening the first variable winning device 30 a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". Is. Since such an opening pattern is not particularly adopted in the present embodiment, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, since the counter value normally reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

When the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted as described above, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5380 to S5390 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5395, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

Step S5398: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 124). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process]
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the winning opening. This large winning opening closing process is for continuing or terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is in a big win (big hit game), and if it is in a big win (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5402.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached. If the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the big hit game is started after the small hit is completed, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b at the time of the small hit is treated as the first round and the big hit is performed. The first round in which the game is started is treated as the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (14 or 15 after 1 subtraction) ( No), then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 118). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, the main control CPU 72 executes the large winning opening closing process again, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds.

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[At the time of small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the value of the opening count counter is incremented.

Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after increment has reached the set open count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5258 in FIG. 122). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 118). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, and the main control CPU 72 again executes the large winning opening closing process, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S541 , Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5414.

Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the release count counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for termination processing. This termination process is for adjusting the conditions for terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the jackpot flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5503. To do.

Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the jackpot flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit in progress" from the internal state flag here, and ends the big hit game on the control process (end of big win). The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (whether it is set). This flag is used for the jackpot other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 106) during the previous special symbol change preprocessing, and the time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through the specific area during the previous specific area passage process (FIG. It is set in step S5370) in 127.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 1 time (or 10 times)). The value of the set time reduction number is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, in order to manage the number of time reductions, two types of time reduction counter values (first number of times cut counter value and second number of times cut counter value) are prepared. Here, the first number-of-times cut counter value is a variable that is decremented each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "10" is set as an initial value. The second special symbol value is a variable that is decremented (subtracted by 1) each time the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "1" is set as the initial value. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not 01H (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute steps S5512 and S5513.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 wins when the transition condition to the time shortened state is satisfied (when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, when the winning symbol for shifting to the time shortened state is won). ), After the end of the jackpot game, advantageous conditions were applied from the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state) to the non-time shortened state (the variable time of the normal symbol lottery was shortened, and the variable start winning device It is possible to shift to a time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) in which the opening time is extended (advantageous gaming state transitioning means).

Step S5513: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number setting process. This process is the same as the process of step S5372 in FIG. 127.

The procedure up to this point is for a big hit, but in the case of a small hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

Step S5520, Step S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and also deletes "in small hit game" from the internal state flag. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on the flag. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is reset or the major winning combination ends, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the time reduction function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "time reduction in progress" is generated as the internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 105) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Game flow (1)]
FIG. 132 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol fluctuates in the normal mode.
When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode (park mode). The "normal mode" is a "non-time reduction state".

[F1] If the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 during the game in the normal mode, the [F2] first special symbol changes.

[F3] If the first special symbol lottery results in "missing", the state of [F1] normal mode is restarted.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F5] first winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode. [F8] The drive mode at this time is the "time reduction state". In the present embodiment, in the drive mode, two effect modes having different appearances of the effect are prepared, and the player can select one of them. Specifically, the two production modes are the earth drive mode (hereinafter, abbreviated as "earth mode") in which a background image showing a state in which a car in which a female character is riding is traveling on the ground is displayed. , There are two space drive modes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "space mode") in which a background image showing a spacecraft on which an alien is on board is swimming in space is displayed.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F7] second winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

[Game flow (2)]
FIG. 133 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the time shortened state.
[F8] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the drive mode in the time shortened state (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol is displayed. fluctuate.

[F13] In the second special symbol lottery, it becomes a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if it corresponds to the [F14] third winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed, and [F8] the drive mode in the time shortened state. Move to.

[F13] The second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if it corresponds to the [F15] fourth winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed, and [F20] a drive in a non-time shortened state. Move to mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F17] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode in the time shortened state.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F19] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F20] shifts to the drive mode in the non-time shortened state.

[Game flow (3)]
FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state.
[F20] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol Fluctuates.

[F13] In the second special symbol lottery, it becomes a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if it corresponds to the [F14] third winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed, and [F8] the drive mode in the time shortened state. Move to.

[F13] When the second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F15] fourth winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F17] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode in the time shortened state.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F19] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, once the time is shortened (consecutive villa state), the fluctuation of one time reduction of the second special symbol and one memory of the second special symbol are totaled by 2. You can get the chance of hitting (big hit or small hit). Then, if one of the two opportunities is won with a winning symbol with a time reduction, the game will return to the time shortened state (consecutive villa state) again. Therefore, it is possible to continue to stay in the drive mode as long as it does not correspond to the winning symbol with no time reduction in succession in these two opportunities.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 and the operation of the drum unit 200 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the internal lottery of the jackpot is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they lack the apparent appealing power. Similarly, the mode of the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 is also a symbolic design by a 7-segment LED or the like, and also “ It has little visual impact as a "winning symbol". Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect and a stop display effect are performed using the liquid crystal display 42 and the drum unit 200.

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 42 displays the effect symbol Hz (this symbol), the markers M1, the markers M2, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the background image corresponding to the stay mode, the image related to the notice effect, and the like. , A pseudo-effect symbol such as 7 symbols is displayed on the drum unit 200.

The effect symbol Hz displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 includes, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Displayed side by side. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed on each effect symbol. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all form a symbol sequence (effect symbol arrangement) in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

There are three pseudo-effect symbols displayed on the drum unit 200: a pseudo-left effect symbol displayed on the left reel 201, a pseudo-middle effect symbol displayed on the middle reel 202, and a pseudo-right effect symbol displayed on the right reel 203. These are included and are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right sides of the display area of the drum unit 200. Each reel includes 7 symbols, a panda symbol, and a cherry symbol, and as each reel rotates, the simulated effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

FIGS. 135 and 136 are continuous views showing an example of an effect image corresponding to a variable display and a stop display of a special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the fluctuation display effect and the stop display effect performed by using the liquid crystal display 42 and the drum unit 200 is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) to the stop display (including the fixed stop). Further, the stop display effect is an effect indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed and that the result of the internal lottery at that time has been displayed. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 135 (A): For example, in the state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (the state during the demonstration effect), there are three rows of effect symbol Hz in the lower right region of the liquid crystal display 42. It is displayed. At this time, the effect symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Further, in the lower left area of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (with reference numerals M1 and M2 in the figure) indicating the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. These markers M1 and M2 display the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a) corresponding to the respective display numbers. It is represented, and the number of displayed items increases or decreases in accordance with the change in the number of working memories during the game. Further, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (○) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by a broken line). Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0. Since the maximum number of working memories of the second special symbol is one, only one marker M2 is lit at the maximum.

Further, a fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed in the area on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the above-mentioned left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variation display of the effect symbol Hz. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed in response to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. It is a thing. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "big hit" or "small hit" instead of "missing", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are displayed in the corresponding modes (for example, blue display color, red display color, etc.). Is displayed as stopped.

On the other hand, on the effective line in the middle of the drum unit 200, a "panda symbol" corresponding to "off" is displayed.

[Start of variable display production]
FIG. 135 (B): For example, each reel of the drum unit 200 starts rotating in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates to produce a variable display effect. Is started (design production execution means). In the figure, the variation display of the simulated effect symbol of the drum unit 200 and the variation display of the effect symbol Hz are simply indicated by downward arrows.

A background image is displayed in the central region of the liquid crystal display 42, and this background image represents the scenery of the park. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". The "normal mode" is a non-time reduction state. In addition to this, various modes are provided for production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the internal "time saving state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol Hz, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color. ..

[Left production symbol stop]
FIG. 135 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, first, the pseudo left effect symbol of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 and the effect symbol Hz left effect of the liquid crystal display 42 are produced. The symbol stops changing. In this example, "7 green symbols" are stopped as pseudo left effect symbols at the middle position of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200, and the number "8" is used as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect symbol to be represented is stopped.

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in FIG. 135 (B) above, the number of working memories of the oldest first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, so that the position is located on the leftmost side in conjunction with this. The number of displayed markers M1 has been reduced by one. That is, up to that time, there were a total of four working memory numbers of the marker M1, but the marker M1, which is the earliest (oldest) memory number display, is hidden, and the effect consumed by the internal lottery is combined. Be told. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the total number of working memories has been reduced to three, and the working memory corresponding to any special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) is consumed. It is possible to teach the working memory in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, in the example of FIG. 135 (C), since the working memory at the head in the memory order is consumed and the remaining three are, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are one by one. The effect is to shift in the direction (here, to the left). As a result, it is possible to accurately express the context of the change in the number of working memories in the production, and to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one". it can.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 136 (D): Next, the "panda symbol" is stopped as a pseudo right effect symbol at the middle position of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200, and the number is used as the right effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol representing "3" is stopped.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 136 (E): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. When the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the pseudo effect symbol of the drum unit 200 and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are the same. The stop display effect is performed in the form of non-winning (missing). That is, in the illustrated example, the "panda symbol" is stopped as a pseudo-middle effect symbol at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the number "1" is used as the middle effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production design that represents is stopped. In this case, the combination of the pseudo effect symbols displayed on the effective line in the middle of the drum unit 200 is the deviation of "green 7 symbols"-"panda symbol"-"panda symbol", and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42. Since the combination of Hz is the deviation of "8"-"1"-"3", it is expressed in the production that this fluctuation corresponds to the normal "outside". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

The above is an example of a variation display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

[Example of production at the time of big hit]
137 to 139 are continuous views showing the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit. Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

In the following reach effect, after the fluctuation display by the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is performed on the first special symbol display device 34, for example, the first special symbol is an aspect of "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol". (For example, 7-segment LED "self", "yo", "mouth", "Snake", "F", "E", "L", "Γ", etc.) is executed until it is stopped and displayed ( Reach production execution means).

[Variable display effect]
In FIG. 137 (A): Each reel of the drum unit 200 starts rotating in substantially synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol), and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates. By doing so, the variable display effect is started.

[Preliminary notice before reach occurs (1st stage)]
In FIG. 137 (B): When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the first stage pre-reach advance notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed on the liquid crystal display 42. This pre-reach advance notice effect is a notice effect in which the mode changes stepwise from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The picture image used in this pre-reach advance notice effect is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes may be used). The "pre-reach notice" is a production that announces the possibility of reach and the possibility of a big hit. By executing such a "pre-reach advance notice effect", it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may develop into reach = the possibility of a big hit increases".

[Pre-reach notice production (second stage)]
In FIG. 137 (C): After the first stage mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach advance notice effect mode is subsequently advanced to the second stage. Here, as the second stage notice effect before the occurrence of reach, an effect using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another picture image additionally appears from the right edge of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed picture image. Further, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the previously displayed pattern image. Then, the character represented by the picture image emits a line (for example, "become a reach"), which is also produced by acoustic output.

The pre-reach advance notice effect (second stage) using such a second pattern image goes one step further from the pre-reach advance notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 137 (B) above. It's an advanced type. The mode of "pre-reach notice production" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach advance notice effect, but in an effect mode in which the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed. There may be. Further, for example, each time the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage picture images appear and are displayed one after another, the size may be expanded. Even at this stage, the variable display effect is being continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) of a big hit due to this change by advancing the change of the mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect to more stages. (For example, progressing to the 5th stage suggests the maximum degree of expectation, etc.).

[Stop of left effect design]
In FIG. 138 (D): When the middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, the pseudo left effect symbol of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 and the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop the fluctuation. In this example, "7 red symbols" are stopped as pseudo left effect symbols at the middle position of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200, and the number "7" is used as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect symbol to be represented is stopped.

[Occurrence of reach state]
In FIG. 138 (E): Then, the pseudo right effect symbol of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200 and the right effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop fluctuating. In this example, "7 red symbols" are stopped as pseudo-right effect symbols at the middle position of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200, and the number "7" is used as the right effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect symbol to be represented is stopped. As a result, the reach state of "7 red symbols"-"changing"-"7 red symbols" is generated in the simulated effect symbol of the drum unit 200, and "7" is generated in the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. "-" Fluctuating "-" 7 "reach state has occurred. In addition, an effect such as "reach!" Is output at the same time. After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning is executed. Regarding the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, the display state may be "changing"-"changing"-"changing" without generating a clear reach state.

[Preliminary production after reach occurs]
In FIG. 138 (F): After a short time after the reach state occurs, on the liquid crystal display 42, for example, images representing a "heart" figure form a group and pass diagonally on the screen. Will be done. In this case, since the image of the "heart group" is suddenly displayed on the screen as if flowing, it is possible to enhance the visual appeal to the player. By executing the advance notice effect after the occurrence of such a visually lively reach, it is possible to obtain an effect of giving the player a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 139 (G): Following the notice effect after the reach occurs, a "ghost of a pumpkin" as an enemy character appears on the left side of the screen on the liquid crystal display 42, and a "male character" as a ally character appears on the right side of the screen. "Appears, and the characters" VS "appear in the center of the screen.

In FIG. 139 (H): At the end of the reach production, the "pumpkin ghost" punches innumerably, and the "male character" responds with a chop. If the "male character" wins in this state, it will be a big hit, and if the "male character" is defeated, it will be a loss.

[Stop display production (production at the time of winning)]
In FIG. 139 (I): When the "male character" is displayed large and the "pumpkin ghost" is displayed small together with the characters "victory !!", it means that it is a big hit. Then, substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, the pseudo medium effect symbol of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200 and the medium effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop the fluctuation. In this example, "7 red symbols" are stopped as pseudo-right effect symbols at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the number "7" is used as the intermediate effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect symbol to be represented is stopped. The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to a big hit (for example, a red display color).

At the time of non-winning (at the time of loss), "Pumpkin ghost" is displayed large and "Male character" is displayed small along with the characters "Defeat ...". In this case, the "panda symbol" is stopped as a pseudo right effect symbol at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the effect representing a number other than the number "7" as the middle effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The symbol is stopped.

[Direction during a major role]
FIGS. 140 and 141 are continuous views partially showing an example of a big winning effect performed during a big hit game. In addition, the following production during the important role is an production executed by the liquid crystal display 42.

[Big hit game start]
In FIG. 140 (A): When the jackpot game is started, for example, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the screen, and a unique production image (for example, a female character) is displayed during the jackpot game. ..

["Right-handed" display during major roles]
Further, in the present embodiment, since the first variable winning device 30 is arranged in the right side portion in the game area 8a, the right side portion in the game area 8a is designated as the launch position (launch direction) of the game ball during the big role. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the above-mentioned firing position designation display lamp 38f is lit and displayed under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the firing position designation command indicating "right-handed" is transmitted to the effect control device 124. In response to this, guidance information (arrow indicating the right direction, characters of "right-handed", etc.) prompting "right-handed" is displayed in the display screen on the effect control by the effect control CPU 126).

[1st round]
In FIG. 140 (B): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, 10 circles are displayed along with the character information of "BIG BONUS" in the upper left part of the screen. Then, the ○ mark located on the leftmost side is displayed in red (hatching of diagonal lines), and the remaining 9 ○ marks are displayed in white. As a result, the number of balls that can be obtained is 10 rounds, the current round is the first of the 10 rounds, and each round in which a ball can be obtained is marked with a circle. It is possible to teach the player that it is displayed in red.

[10th round]
In FIG. 140 (C): After that, the jackpot game progresses smoothly, and for example, when the game shifts to the 10th round, for example, all 10 circles are displayed in red. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that all the rounds in which the ball can be obtained in the 10th round are completed.

[Time reduction state rush production]
In FIG. 141 (D): Then, the effect of displaying the character information such as "Enter drive mode!" Is executed by using the end time (ending time) of the big hit game. This makes it possible to teach the player that the "drive mode" will be started from now on. In addition, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the game proceeds by hitting right even in the "drive mode".

Here, during the ending production, a notification is given to remind the user of forgetting to remove the prepaid card, such as "Be careful not to forget to remove the prepaid card", or prevent the user from being absorbed in the game, such as "Be careful about being absorbed in the game". The notification may be executed.

[Big hit game finished, time shortened state]
In FIG. 141 (E): When the jackpot game is completed and the internal state (game state) is set to the time reduction state, the stay mode is set to the "drive mode", and the background image is the car on which the woman is riding. It is changed to an image that expresses the state of running on the ground. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the current internal state (game state) is a time shortened state different from the normal state.

[Time saving and medium production]
In this way, when the game is proceeding in the time-reduced state, the time-saving medium-time effect (advantageous game state effect) for displaying the background image corresponding to the time-reduced state (advantageous game state) is executed.

[Right-handed suggestion production]
Further, at the upper part of the screen, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed. In the right-handed suggestion effect, a band-shaped area is provided at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and right-handed character information and a right-pointing arrow symbol are displayed in the band-shaped area. It should be noted that such a right-handed suggestion effect is continuously executed when the game state is the time shortened state. Then, by executing such an effect, it is possible to urge the player to "hit right".

[Remaining number display effect]
Further, at the lower left of the screen, the remaining number of times display effect is executed. In the remaining number display effect, a rectangular area is provided at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the remaining number of times the game can be advanced in the drive mode is displayed in the rectangular area. In the illustrated example, the information of "remaining 2 times" is displayed. The remaining number of times is subtracted by 1 each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the drive mode in the time shortened state or the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Therefore, the remaining number of times is not subtracted even if the first special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortened state or the non-time shortened state.

[Example of drive mode (time reduction state)]
FIGS. 142 to 144 are continuous views showing an example of the effect of the drive mode.

In FIG. 142 (A): In the drive mode, the background image is changed to an image showing a state in which a car in which a woman is riding is traveling on the ground. The combination of the pseudo effect symbols displayed on the effective line in the middle of the drum unit 200 is the winning of "7 red symbols"-"7 red symbols"-"7 red symbols", and the effect of the liquid crystal display 42. The combination of symbol Hz is the winning item of "7"-"7"-"7". This shows the outcome at the time of winning. Further, at the upper part of the screen, the right-handed suggestion effect is executed, and such a right-handed suggestion effect is continuously executed when the game state is the time shortened state.
The backlight of the drum unit 200 may be made to emit light in a predetermined color in conjunction with the background image of the liquid crystal.

[Start of fluctuation of special symbol]
In FIG. 142 (B): At the time of the first hit with the first special symbol, the memory of the first special symbol is often stored, and the memory of the second special symbol is generally not stored. In the illustrated example, four memories (marker M1) of the first special symbol are stored. Therefore, when the drive mode is entered in such a situation, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the memory of the first special symbol is not accumulated, the player executes a right-handed strike to first execute the change of the second special symbol. Then, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the drum unit 200 starts rotating accordingly, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z1 also start to fluctuate. Here, in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol, it is assumed that it corresponds to the loss.

[End of change of 1st special symbol]
In FIG. 142 (C): When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the disengaged manner, the pseudo effect symbol of the drum unit 200, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 of the liquid crystal display 42 are also disengaged. It is stopped and displayed in the mode of. During this time, it is assumed that the player executes a right-handed hit, a plurality of game balls pass through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and one game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b. .. In this case, one memory (marker M2) of the second special symbol is accumulated.

Here, since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is not subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times remains as the remaining two times.

In FIG. 143 (D): Since the memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are digested in the order of winning, the remaining three memories of the first special symbol are digested after that. Then, when the digestion of the remaining memory of the first special symbol is completed, the internal lottery is next executed using the memory of the second special symbol. Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the drum unit 200 starts rotating accordingly, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 also start to fluctuate. Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol.

[Starting small hits, opening the second big prize opening]
In FIG. 143 (E): Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the simulated effect symbol of the drum unit 200 (combination of "cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol"), The effect symbol Hz (combination of "5"-"2"-"6") of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small hit mode. As a result, the small hit game is started, and the second big winning opening 31b is opened. Then, the car in which the female character is riding speeds up and moves to the right side of the screen. Further, for example, the player executes a right-handed strike during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and one game ball is opened to the right start winning opening. It is assumed that the ball has entered 28b. In this case, one memory (marker M2) of the second special symbol is accumulated.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is the remaining one time.

In FIG. 143 (F): When the small hit game is started, a production in which the hermit character utters the line "Aim at the attacker in the lower right" is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player that the game ball must be entered into the second variable winning device 31.

[Passing through a specific area]
In FIG. 144 (G): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to the small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is the sixth winning symbol. To do. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and issues a line such as "Yeah! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End small hit, start big hit game]
In FIG. 144 (H): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is.

After that, the same production during the jackpot game as described above is started, and the jackpot game progresses. For example, if the winning symbol at the time of a small hit related to the 2nd special symbol corresponds to the 6th winning symbol, the ball is effectively obtained for 9 rounds (10 rounds of balls including the small hit game). can do. When the big hit game is executed in the drive mode, the big role production dedicated to the winning in the drive mode may be executed.

FIGS. 145 and 146 are continuous views showing an example of effect when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Such a situation occurs mainly in the final fluctuation of the time shortened state, in which the big hit game is executed corresponding to the big hit of the "4th winning symbol" or the small hit of the "6th winning symbol", and the first 2 This is the case where the memory of the special symbol is accumulated.

Here, it is assumed that one memory of the second special symbol exists. For this reason, the time-saving and medium-time production is continuously executed. In addition, as the remaining number of times display effect, the information of "remaining one time" is displayed. However, the right-handed suggestion effect has not been executed.

[During display of fluctuations in special symbols]
In FIG. 145 (A): When the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the drum unit 200 starts rotating accordingly, and the effect symbol Hz and the th. 4 The fluctuation of the symbol Z2 also starts.

[Continuation of variable display production]
In FIG. 145 (B): The variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Along with this, the rotation of the drum unit 200 continues, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 also continue to fluctuate. Since the situation here is not a time-reduced state, the probability that the variable start winning device 28 will be open for a long time is low even if the start gate 20 is passed. Therefore, basically, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be stored. Therefore, the drive mode in such a non-time shortened state becomes a chance zone in which the second special symbol fluctuates at most once.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 145 (C): Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the simulated effect symbol of the drum unit 200 (combination of "cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol") and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42. The Hz (combination of "2"-"2"-"3") and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small hit mode. In this case, the effect that the animal character raises the "mark on which the number 7 is displayed" is executed.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is 0 times remaining.

[Starting small hits, opening the second big prize opening]
In FIG. 146 (D): Then, when the small hit game is started, the second big winning opening 31b is opened, and the car on which the female character is riding speeds up and moves to the right side of the screen. Will be executed. At this time, an effect of leaving the animal character behind is executed.

[Passing through a specific area]
In FIG. 146 (E): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to the small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is the sixth winning symbol. To do. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and issues a line such as "Yeah! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End small hit, start big hit game]
FIG. 146 (F): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is. After that, the same production during the jackpot game as described above is started, and the jackpot game progresses. Then, when the jackpot game is executed corresponding to the sixth winning symbol in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot game is completed.

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing the flow of the game regarding the game state and the launch direction.
The following game flow is the game flow when the consecutive villa state ends in the shortest time.
Specifically, in the non-time reduction state, the big hit of the "1st winning type (with time reduction)" is won, and in the time reduction state, the small hit of the "6th winning type (no time reduction)" is won, and the non-time reduction is achieved. This is the flow of the game when a small hit of the "sixth winning type (no time reduction)" is won in the state.
The gaming state progresses in the order of No1 to No13.

[No1]
The "game state" is the "first special symbol variation", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed".
At the start of the game, the first special symbol is changed to aim for a big hit.

[No2]
The "game state" is "big hit (first hit, first big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". Here, it is assumed that the jackpot of the "first winning type (with time reduction)" is won.

[No3]
The "game state" is the "time reduction state", and the "launch direction" is the "right-handed".
When the gaming state shifts from the non-time shortened state to the time shortened state, the firing direction becomes right-handed.

[No4]
The "game state" is the "first special symbol variation (short variation)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The memory of the first special symbol accumulated at the time of the first hit is digested at high speed.

[No5]
The "game state" is the "second special symbol fluctuation (time reduction state, memory +1)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". During the change of the second special symbol, one memory of the second special symbol can be stored.

[No6]
The "game state" is "second special symbol stop (time shortened state end)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". When the game state shifts from the time-shortened state to the non-time-shortened state when the second special symbol is stopped, the firing direction is switched from right-handed to left-handed.

[No7]
The "game state" is "memory increase of the first special symbol", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Up to 4 memories of the 1st special symbol can be stored.

[No8]
The "game state" is "big hit via small hit (second big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The firing direction during the small hit game or the big hit game is right-handed. Here, it is assumed that the small hit of the "sixth winning type (no time reduction)" is won.

[No9]
The "game state" is the "second special symbol fluctuation (non-time shortened state)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Here, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be increased.

[No10]
The "game state" is "memory increase of the first special symbol", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Up to 4 memories of the 1st special symbol can be stored.

[No11]
The "game state" is "second special symbol stop", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". The launch direction continues to be left-handed.

[No12]
The "game state" is "big hit via small hit (third big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The firing direction during the small hit game or the big hit game is right-handed. Here, it is assumed that the small hit of the "sixth winning type (no time reduction)" is won.

[No13]
The "game state" is "the end of a big hit for one set (three times)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". In this case, the mode shifts to the normal mode. In this way, if the winning symbol without time reduction (for example, "sixth winning type (no time reduction)") is applied twice in a row, the consecutive villa state ends.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the above effect will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect, reach effect, advance notice effect before reach occurrence, memory number display effect, large role effect, effect using liquid crystal display 42 or drum unit 200, time saving medium effect, right-handed suggestion effect, remaining number display effect, etc. Are all controlled through the following control processes.

[Production control processing]
As described with reference to FIG. 94, the effect control device 124 has a function as an effect control processor (overall control unit) and a function as an effect reproduction processor (individual control unit). By linking, the operation of each device (screen display by liquid crystal display 42, audio output by speakers 54, 55, 56, light emission by various lamps 46 to 52, board lamp 53, etc., various movable bodies by movable body motor 57, etc. By controlling the operation, etc.), the effect reproduction on the pachinko machine 1 is realized.

Therefore, for convenience of explanation, in the following description, the operating subject when the effect control CPU 126 functions as the effect control processor (overall control unit) is referred to as the effect control unit 210, and the effect reproduction processor (individual control unit). ), The "display control unit 220", "voice control unit 222", "ramp control unit 224", "movable body control unit 226", or "movable body control unit 226", as appropriate, depending on the device to be controlled. It is referred to as "input control unit 228". In addition, these control units 220, 222, 224, 226, 228 that function as an effect reproduction processor (individual control unit) may be collectively referred to as "each individual control unit". Further, the operation subject that manages the time related to the effect reproduction is referred to as "time management unit 230" or "ACT".

As a rough flow of the effect control, first, when the effect control unit 210 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, a command for instructing the reproduction of the effect according to the contents is issued in the RAM 130 (storage means). Output to a predetermined area of (effect control means). The command output by the effect control unit 210 is transmitted by the time management unit 230 to each individual control unit at a predetermined timing. In response to this, each individual control unit refers to a command, gives a specific instruction to each device based on the content of the command, and controls the operation of each device (effect operation control means). As a result of such control, the effect operation by each device is executed (effect operation execution means). That is, the command output by the effect control unit 210 uniquely specifies the effect operation of each device (effect operation command).

In addition, each individual control unit can specify one effect operation by one received command or by combining a plurality of commands when controlling the effect operation of each device. Further, the time management unit 230 activates the control table in which the details of the effect operation associated with the content of the command are defined at the same time as the transmission of the command to each individual control unit or instead of the transmission of the command. Is also possible. When the control table is activated, each individual control unit analyzes the contents of the control table and gives specific instructions to each device based on the contents.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control unit 210. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control unit 210 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium other effect processing (step S402a), and drum unit effect management process. (Step S403), special fluctuation effect management process (step S403a), display output process (step S404), lamp drive process (step S406), acoustic drive process (step S408), effect random number update process (step S410), and others. It is a configuration including a group of subroutines of the process (step S412) of. Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control unit 210 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control unit 210 analyzes the received commands and saves them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special symbol destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory increase effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory decrease effect command, and a start command. Mouth winning sound control command, demo production command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, status specification command, round number command, launch position specification command, error notification command, jackpot There are end effect commands, fluctuation pattern destination judgment commands, stop display time end commands, count cut counter commands, various error commands, special fluctuation count specification commands, and the like.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the execution of the above-mentioned storage number display effect and the pre-reading advance notice effect using the marker M1. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, and the first variable winning device 30 or the second. It controls the content of the effect when the variable winning device 31 is opened and closed. Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern for various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). As described above, in the effect symbol management process, the effect control unit 210 displays the effect contents (effect symbol Hz, fourth symbol Z1, Z2, markers M1, M2, production contents related to the important role production, etc.) displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. The process of determining the contents of various notice effects) is executed. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S402a: The effect control unit 210 executes other effect processes such as during the time reduction and during the pseudo time reduction. In this process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of determining the effect contents related to the right-handed suggestion effect, the remaining number of times display effect, and the like. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S403: In the drum unit effect management process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of controlling the drum unit 200 based on the effect content determined in the effect symbol management process. In this way, in the drum unit effect management process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of determining the effect content to be displayed on the drum unit 200 (effect content related to the pseudo effect symbol, content related to the movement of the drum unit 200). The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S403a: In the special variation effect management process, the effect control unit 210 determines whether or not to execute the special variation effect based on the special variation number designation command, and if it is determined to execute, what kind of content is there? Executes the process of determining whether to execute the effect during the special fluctuation of.

Specifically, when a special variation pattern for a short time (about several seconds) is selected, the effect control unit 210 performs an effect pattern that executes a non-reach effect (for example, an effect that fluctuates the effect symbol at high speed). When the special variation pattern for a long time (about several tens of seconds) is selected, the process of selecting the effect pattern for executing the reach effect or the like is executed.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control unit 210 first tells the display control unit 220 the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the operation memory effect pattern number, and the look-ahead notice. Outputs a command instructing the effect pattern number, the variable effect pattern number, the variable time notice effect number, the background pattern number, etc.). In response to this, the display control unit 220 gives a specific drawing instruction to the VDP 152 based on the content of the command, and controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, the effect control unit 210 first outputs a command instructing the lamp control unit 224 to indicate the effect content. In response to this, the lamp control unit 224 relays the LED driver 198 based on the content of the command, outputs a specific drive signal to the driver IC 132, and drives (lights up) various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like. Or turn off, blink, change brightness gradation, etc.).

Step S408: In the next acoustic drive process, first, the effect control unit 210 sends the effect content (for example, during the variable display effect, the reach effect, the mode transition effect, and the jackpot effect) to the voice control unit 222, and the sound data. Etc.) is output as a command. In response to this, the voice control unit 222 gives an instruction of specific output contents to the voice IC 134 based on the contents of the command, and sounds (sound effects, BGM, etc.) according to the production contents from the speakers 54, 55, 56. Is output.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control unit 210 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In another process, for example, the effect control unit 210 first outputs a command instructing the movable body control unit 226 to indicate the effect content. In response to this, the movable body control unit 226 instructs the SMC 199 of specific control contents based on the contents of the command. In response to this, the SMC 199 creates an operation pattern of the movable body 40f based on the instruction from the movable body control unit 226, outputs a control signal corresponding to the operation pattern to the driver IC, and drives the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates by using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above-mentioned effect control process, the effect control unit 210 can comprehensively control the effect content in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the effect symbol management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S700: First, the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not a effect command for increasing the number of operating memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories increases. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S702. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect of displaying the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol or the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S704: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of operation memories is reduced has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control unit 210 eliminates the markers M1 or M2 corresponding to the lottery elements consumed by the internal lottery, and slides the remaining markers M1 and M2 not consumed by the internal lottery to the left. Select.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 148).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process is completed, the effect symbol change process is completed. As the next jump destination, the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) is selected. Further, the variable winning device operating time process (step S508) is selected as the jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 105) is selected in the main control CPU 72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control unit 210 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2. Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type (type of winning symbol), fluctuation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern (preliminary effect) for the advance notice effect. Select a pre-reach notice pattern, a post-reach notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control unit 210 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing processing, the effect control unit 210 gives an instruction to each individual control unit as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect, the input control unit 228 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and the effect content according to the result ( Button effect) is instructed to each individual control unit by a command.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control unit 210 gives an instruction to each individual control unit in order to control the content of the stop display effect according to the result of the internal lottery. For example, the effect control unit 210 instructs each individual control unit to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect by a command. In response to this, for example, the display control unit 220 ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effect (design effect execution). means).

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control unit 210 controls the effect content during the small hit game or the big hit. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the effect during the major role according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Comparison of two production modes in drive mode]
FIG. 151 is a table comparing two effect modes that can be selected in the drive mode. As described above, in the present embodiment, two effect modes (earth mode and space mode) are prepared in the drive mode, and during the drive mode stay, one of the effect modes selected by the player is selected. Various productions are performed.

The two production modes differ greatly in the characteristics (how they are shown and tendencies) of the production. First, in the earth mode, a wide variety of notice effects such as conversation notice, step-up notice, mini character notice, cut-in notice, etc. can be executed. On the other hand, in the space mode, the effect is composed mainly of the movement of the symbol, and the effect that makes the special symbol appear to change many times during one change of the special symbol is executed. (Pseudo-variation effect executing means. Hereinafter, pseudo-variation that is continuously executed during one variation of a special symbol is referred to as "pseudo-ream"). That is, in the space mode, a preliminary expression is made by changing the appearance of the design in various ways, and the preliminary production itself is hardly executed.

Therefore, when comparing the two, in the earth mode, the frequency of the advance notice effect is high, and the number of commands (designated information related to the effect) output by the effect control unit 210 increases accordingly, and the maximum is Although 1146 kinds of commands can be output, the pseudo-ream occurs only 7 times at the maximum. On the other hand, in the space mode, the frequency of occurrence of the advance notice effect is low, and the number of commands output by the effect control unit 210 is also reduced accordingly, and the maximum number of commands that can be output is only 46. Pseudo-ream can occur up to 31 times.

In this way, the number of commands and the number of pseudo-reams differ greatly between the earth mode and the space mode. In the process of effect control, various information is stored in the RAM 130, but since the capacity of the RAM 130 is limited, it is necessary to devise how to use the area in the RAM 130 in order to efficiently control the execution of the effect. is there.

It should be noted that the number of occurrences of the pseudo-ream described above includes one time of this fluctuation, and among the plurality of pseudo-variations (pseudo-variations) constituting the pseudo-ream, the last pseudo-variation is the main fluctuation. Corresponds to. For example, when the number of occurrences of the pseudo-ream is 3, the first and second pseudo-variations are apparent fluctuations, and the third pseudo-variation is the main variation. In addition, although not shown, in the normal mode, various warning effects are executed as in the earth mode (the types of commands that can be output fall within the range of the types in the earth mode), but the fluctuation of the symbol is not shown. It is composed only of this fluctuation, and no apparent fluctuation occurs.

[Usage mode of RAM in production control device: Embodiment]
FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating a usage mode of the RAM 130 (built-in RAM of the effect control CPU 126).

In the present embodiment, in order to control the effect in each effect mode, an execution area 240, a pseudo area 250 for the earth mode, and a pseudo area 260 for the space mode are provided inside the RAM 130. All of these areas are storage areas for temporarily storing commands output by the effect control unit 210. Of these, the earth mode pseudo area 250 and the space mode pseudo area 260 are special symbols. It is used to store various commands that are output in response to the content of the effect that is determined before the start of the fluctuation of. On the other hand, the execution area 240 is used to store the command corresponding to the effect at a predetermined timing before the effect is executed, and is stored in a part of the earth mode pseudo area 250 or the space mode pseudo area 260. The command that has been executed is transcribed and stored. Hereinafter, the configuration of each region will be described in detail.

The earth mode pseudo area 250 is a storage area used when the earth mode is selected in the drive mode. As described above, since the pseudo-ream occurs up to 7 times in the earth mode, the pseudo-region 250 for the earth mode starts from the pseudo-region 250-1 for the first pseudo-variation (pseudo 1). A total of seven pseudo regions are provided up to the pseudo regions 250-7 for the seventh pseudo fluctuation (pseudo 7). Further, since a maximum of 1146 types of commands are output in the earth mode, the pseudo regions 250-1 to 250-7 have 1146 storage areas inside each of them. Therefore, the total number of storage areas in the entire pseudo region 250 for the earth mode is 8022 (= 1146 × 7).

In the normal mode, as described above, there is no apparent fluctuation and it is composed only of this fluctuation, and the types of commands that can be output fall within the range of the types in the earth mode. It is possible to store all commands in the earth mode pseudo region 250 without providing an region. Therefore, in the normal mode, the earth mode pseudo region 250 is used. That is, the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode is used in both the earth mode and the normal mode.

Further, the space mode pseudo area 260 is a storage area used when the space mode is selected in the drive mode. As described above, in the space mode, the pseudo-ream occurs up to 31 times. Therefore, in accordance with this, the pseudo-region 260 for the space mode starts from the pseudo-region 260-1 for the first pseudo-variation (pseudo 1). A total of 31 pseudo regions are provided up to the pseudo regions 260-31 for the 31st pseudo fluctuation (pseudo 31). Further, since a maximum of 46 types of commands are output in the space mode, each of the pseudo regions 260-1 to 260-31 has 46 storage areas. Therefore, the total number of storage areas in the space mode pseudo region 260 is 1426 (= 46 × 31).

Before the start of the change of the special symbol, in the above-mentioned effect symbol change preprocessing (step S502 in FIG. 150), the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern to be executed according to the result of the effect lottery or the like. At this time, the effect control unit 210 stores various commands corresponding to the effect pattern in a predetermined area of the earth mode pseudo area 250 or the space mode pseudo area 260. For example, a command having a content corresponding to an effect pattern related to the first pseudo-variation in the earth mode is stored in a predetermined area of the earth mode pseudo area 250-1 (for pseudo 1), and 5 in the space mode. The command of the content corresponding to the effect pattern of the effect related to the second pseudo-variation is stored in a predetermined area of the space mode pseudo area 260-5 (for pseudo 5).

Then, the execution area 240 is stored at a predetermined timing before the effect is executed, that is, before the command corresponding to the effect to be executed (effect to be constructed) is transmitted to each individual control unit. It is a storage area and has 1146 storage areas inside. The execution area 240 can store all kinds of commands that can be stored in the earth mode pseudo area 250 and the space mode pseudo area 260. Before the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, various commands are stored in advance in the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode or the pseudo region 260 for the space mode, and in the execution region 240, the execution timing is matched from these pseudo regions. The command is transcribed and stored.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pseudo region is provided with a structure different for each mode. Further, the total number of storage areas in the entire pseudo area including the pseudo area 250 for the earth mode and the pseudo area 260 for the space mode is 9448 (= 8022 + 1426).

The entity of the execution area 240, the pseudo area 250 for the earth mode, and the pseudo area 260 for the space mode is, for example, an array variable, and the number of the storage area in each area is the position in the array (index number of the array). Is shown.

FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating usage modes of the execution region 240, the earth mode pseudo region 250, and the space mode pseudo region 260. In order to facilitate the understanding of the invention, here, it is assumed that the area where the command is stored is fixed for each type of command in each area.

In FIG. 153 (A): An example of using the execution area 240 is shown. Of the 1146 storage areas of the execution area 240, for example, 10 storage areas in areas 1-10 store commands related to conversation notice. When executing the conversation notice, information such as the display color, the character that appears, and the dialogue that the character utters is specified, and each command corresponding to this information is individually assigned to a predetermined area in areas 1-10. It will be stored. For example, the area 1 stores a command for designating a display color, and the area 2 stores a command for specifying a character to appear. It should be noted that the command is not necessarily stored in all the storage areas, and the command is not stored in the storage area corresponding to the information not specified.

The same applies to other storage areas. For example, commands related to step-up notices are stored in the 10 storage areas in areas 11-20, and commands related to mini character notices are stored in the 10 storage areas in areas 21-30. The command is stored. Further, for example, commands related to variable operation (design operation) are stored in the five storage areas of areas 1101-1105, and symbols (stop rolls) are stored in the five storage areas of area 1106-1110. Commands related to are stored, commands related to fluctuation details (SP reach designation, etc.) are stored in the 10 storage areas of area 1111-1120, and hold storage sections are stored in the 10 storage areas of area 1121-1130. Commands related to (the effect performed in the section where the player is charged with the operation memory) are stored, and the five storage areas of the area 1131-1135 are related to the device system notice (notice not related to the effect by the liquid crystal display 42). Commands are stored, and commands related to irregular relations (correspondence when an unusual way of hitting is made) are stored in the 11 storage areas of areas 1136-1146.

In FIG. 153 (B): An example of use of the pseudo region 250-1 to 250-7 for the earth mode is shown. The pseudo regions 250-1 to 250-7 for the earth mode all have the same structure as the execution region 240, and the 1146 storage areas of each pseudo region 250-1 to 250-7 are used. This is the same as the execution area 240. Therefore, the individual commands stored in the pseudo areas 250-1 to 250-7 are transferred to and stored in the storage area having the same area number in the execution area 240 at a predetermined timing before the execution of the effect. It becomes.

In FIG. 153 (C): An example of use of the space mode pseudo region 260-1 to 260-31 is shown. Each of the space mode pseudo areas 260-1 to 260-31 has 46 storage areas, and the usage of these storage areas is the usage of the storage areas 1101-1146 in the execution area 240. Is similar to. That is, commands related to variable operation are stored in the five storage areas of storage areas 1-5, commands related to symbols are stored in the five storage areas of areas 6-10, and commands related to symbols are stored in areas 11-20 of 10. Commands related to fluctuation details are stored in the storage areas, commands related to the hold storage section are stored in the 10 storage areas in areas 21-30, and commands related to the reserved storage section are stored in the 5 storage areas in areas 31-35. Commands related to device notification are stored, and commands related to irregularity are stored in the 11 storage areas of areas 36 to 46.

Further, each command stored in each pseudo area 260-1 to 260-31 is in the execution area 240 having an area number obtained by adding "1100" to the original area number at a predetermined timing before executing the effect. It is transferred to the storage area of and stored. For example, the command stored in the area 1 of each pseudo area 260-1 to 260-31 is transferred to and stored in the area 1101 in the execution area 240 at a predetermined timing before the execution of the effect.

It should be noted that the above usage mode is given as an example only, and is not limited to this. Further, in the above description, for convenience of explanation, the area where the command is stored is fixed for each type of command, but the area where the command is stored is dynamic immediately before the command is stored in each area. May be decided. In other words, which type of command is stored in which storage area in each area is managed in some way (a specific type of command can be obtained from each area), and the pseudo area for earth mode is used. When a command is transferred and stored from 250 to the execution area 240 or from the space mode pseudo area 260 to the execution area 240, the execution area depends on the type of the transferred command. The configuration may be such that the command can be stored in an appropriate storage area in 240, and in that case, each command may be stored in any storage area in each area.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of use of the execution area 240 at each time point after the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Here, the case where the earth mode is selected in the drive mode will be taken as an example. Hereinafter, the description will be given in chronological order.

In FIG. 154 (A): The state of the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode before the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol is shown. Depending on the result of the effect lottery executed before the start of the change of the special symbol, the command related to the effect executed after the start of the change is stored in the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode. For example, it is determined by the production lottery that the pseudo-ren is executed up to three times, and that the conversation notice, the step-up notice, the mini-character notice, etc. are executed according to each pseudo-variation constituting the pseudo-ren. Then, the commands corresponding to the determined contents of the effect are the pseudo region 250-1 for the earth mode (for pseudo 1), the pseudo region 250-2 for the earth mode (for pseudo 2), and the pseudo region 250-3 for the earth mode. It is stored in a predetermined area (for pseudo 3).

In FIG. 154 (B): The state of the execution area 240 immediately before the start of pseudo 1 (first pseudo variation) is shown. In Pseudo 1, it is decided in advance to execute "conversation notice (weak)" and "step-up notice (first stage)", and in the pseudo region 250-1 for earth mode (for pseudo 1), it is determined. Commands corresponding to these effects are stored. Therefore, immediately before the start of the pseudo 1, the contents of the pseudo area 250-1 for the earth mode (for the pseudo 1) are copied to the execution area 240, and the command corresponding to the effect executed in the pseudo 1 is executed in the execution area 240. It is stored in the predetermined storage area of.

The command stored in the execution area 240 is transmitted to each individual control unit by ACT at a predetermined timing, whereby the storage area in which the command is stored is cleared (it becomes empty). It should be noted that the storage area may not be cleared at this timing, but may be collectively performed at the timing of initializing the entire pseudo area described later. Further, the subsequent flow of the command stored in the execution area 240 will be described in detail later with reference to the following drawings.

FIG. 154 (C): The state of the execution area 240 immediately before the start of pseudo 2 (second pseudo variation) is shown. In Pseudo 2, it is decided in advance to execute "conversation notice (strong)", "step-up notice (second stage)", and "mini character notice (weak)", and the pseudo area 250-2 for the earth mode is executed. Commands corresponding to these effects are stored in (for pseudo 2). Therefore, immediately before the start of the pseudo 2, the contents of the pseudo area 250-2 for the earth mode (for the pseudo 2) are copied to the execution area 240, and the command corresponding to the effect executed in the pseudo 2 is executed in the execution area 240. It is stored in the predetermined storage area of.

In FIG. 154 (D): The state of the execution region 240 immediately before the start of pseudo 3 (third pseudo variation, that is, this variation) is shown. In Pseudo 3, it is decided in advance to execute "step-up notice (third stage)" and "mini character notice (strong)", and in the pseudo region 250-3 for earth mode (for pseudo 3), it is determined. Commands corresponding to these effects are stored. Therefore, immediately before the start of the pseudo 3, the contents of the pseudo area 250-2 for the earth mode (for the pseudo 2) are copied to the execution area 240, and the command corresponding to the effect executed in the pseudo 3 is executed in the execution area 240. It is stored in the predetermined storage area of.

In FIG. 154 (E): The state of the execution area 240 after the determination of the special symbol is shown. After confirmation, the entire pseudo region 250 for the earth mode (for pseudo 1 to pseudo 7) is initialized in preparation for use in the next fluctuation. The timing of initializing the entire pseudo region is not limited after the determination. For example, the entire pseudo area may be initialized before the start of the change (before the command for the next change is stored in each pseudo area) or during the so-called customer waiting state.

Before the start of the change of the special symbol shown in FIG. 154 (A), a command corresponding to the result of the effect lottery executed before the start of the change is stored in a predetermined storage area of each pseudo area. However, the command can be stored even after the special symbol starts to change depending on the situation. For example, if an additional effect lottery is executed after the start of fluctuation, commands are appropriately stored at that timing. In addition, for example, a command output when the number of working memories changes, which is not linked to the start timing of each pseudo-variation and requires an immediate instruction, is pseudo. It may be stored directly in the execution area 240 without going through the areas 250 and 260.

Further, the initialization of each pseudo region may be performed one by one at any time without targeting the entire pseudo region 250 for the earth mode or the entire pseudo region 260 for the space mode. For example, the initialization may be performed individually immediately after the copying from the individual pseudo area to the execution area 240 is completed.

FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating a flow of commands stored in the execution area 240. In order to facilitate the understanding of the invention, FIG. 155 shows only the blocks related to the transfer of commands in the effect control device 124. Further, here, the flow of commands corresponding to the "step-up notice (first stage)" in Pseudo 1 when the earth mode is selected in the drive mode will be given as an example. Hereinafter, the command flow will be described in chronological order.

First, the effect control unit 210 executes (1) an effect lottery before the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and (2) determines a command corresponding to the effect to be executed in the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode according to the result or the like. Store in the area of. Here, each command is composed of, for example, 4 bytes. The command corresponding to the "step-up notice (first stage)" is "0x01040101". Therefore, when the command is stored in the earth mode pseudo area 250 by the effect control unit 210, the command "0x01040101" is stored in a predetermined area (for example, "area 11") of the earth mode pseudo area 250-1 (for pseudo 1). Is stored.

Immediately before the start of the pseudo 1, the contents of (3) the pseudo region 250-1 for the earth mode (for the pseudo 1) are copied to the execution region 240. As a result, the command "0x01040101" is stored in a predetermined storage area (for example, "area 11") of the execution area 240. Then, at a predetermined timing, the time management unit 230 (ACT) outputs each command stored in (4) the execution area 240 to each individual control unit (display control unit 220, voice control unit 222, lamp control unit 224, It is transmitted to the movable body control unit 226). As a result, the command "0x01040101" corresponding to the "step-up notice (first stage)" is transmitted to each individual control unit.

A mailbox is provided in each individual control unit, and commands sent from the ACT are received in each mailbox. In the present embodiment, each individual control unit is configured to check the mailbox each time a timer interrupt occurs. Check the mailbox, and if a command is being received, (5) refer to the command received by each individual control unit. Then, based on the content of the command (6), a specific instruction is given to the effect device to control the operation of the effect device.

More specifically, the display control unit 220 gives a specific instruction to the VDP 152 to control the screen display of the liquid crystal display 42, and the voice control unit 222 gives a specific instruction to the voice IC 134 to give a specific instruction to the speaker 54. , 55, 56, the lamp control unit 224 gives specific instructions to the LED driver 198 to control the light emission of various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, etc., and the movable body control unit 226. Gives specific instructions to the SMC 199 to control the operation of the movable body 40f and the drum unit 200. In this way, the command "0x01040101" is flowed from the upstream side to the downstream side inside the effect control device 124, so that the effect of "step-up notice (first stage)" is constructed in the pseudo 1 and the effect is produced. The device (liquid crystal display, speaker, lamp, movable body) executes the effect operation of "step-up notice (first stage)".

As described above, in the present embodiment, each effect device executes the effect operation uniquely associated with the command output by the effect control unit 210. The above example is an example in which the command and the effect effect are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis, but the mode of association is not limited to this, and the command and the effect effect are associated with each other on a many-to-one basis. An effect operation associated with a combination of a plurality of commands may be executed by each effect device.

Further, in the present embodiment, the control of the effect device by each individual control unit is, in principle, performed based on the command output by the effect control unit 210, and the effect device is not instructed differently from the command. .. However, under specific conditions, each individual control unit may give an instruction different from the command. For example, when the effect control unit 210 outputs a "normal effect symbol command", the display control unit 220 determines whether or not the user is staying in the zone, and if the command is staying in the zone, among the commands. It is also possible to instruct the VDP 152 to display an effect image corresponding to the effect symbol command for the zone, based on the "effect symbol command" part.

The size of the command is not limited to 4 bytes. Further, the confirmation of the mailbox by each individual control unit may be performed by another method instead of performing each time the timer interrupt occurs. For example, when a command is received in the mailbox, a signal indicating that effect may be input, and each individual control unit may check the mailbox with this signal input as a trigger. Further, in the above procedure (4), the ACT can also read the control table provided corresponding to the content of the command from the control ROM 180 and start it. When the control table is activated by ACT, each individual control unit analyzes the effect operation defined in the activated control table in the above procedure (5), and then performs the above procedure (6). In, specific instructions will be given to the production device.

The above example is an example of operation in normal times (when a predetermined condition is not satisfied), but when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when some error or abnormality occurs), it is specified by a command. It is also possible not to let the effect device execute the effect operation, or to limit a part of the effect operation specified by the command to execute the effect operation. For example, while the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 is darkened, the voice control unit 222 may be controlled to interrupt (mute) the output of the symbol stop sound from the speaker by ignoring the "design stop" command. When an error occurs, the lamp control unit 224 may be controlled so as not to execute the lamp emission pattern for the effect A by ignoring the command of "effect A".

Further, depending on the content of the command, not all the effect devices may execute the effect operation corresponding to the command. For example, when each individual control unit receives a command related to a device system notice (notice not related to the effect of the liquid crystal display 42), at least the liquid crystal display 42 is not involved in the device system notice, so at least the liquid crystal display. The display control unit 220 does not control the screen display of the liquid crystal display 42 based on this command because the effect operation for this command does not exist in the 42.

[Usage of RAM in production control device: Comparative example]
FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating a usage mode of the RAM 130'as a comparative example.

In the comparative example, the execution area 240'and the common pseudo area 250' are provided inside the RAM 130'. Of these, the execution area 240'is provided for the same purpose as the execution area 240 in the above-described embodiment, and has the same structure. On the other hand, the common pseudo region 250'is provided as an region that has both the purpose of the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode and the use of the pseudo region 260 for the space mode in the embodiment, and both the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode are in space. It has a structure that is the least common multiple of both, which is different from the pseudo region 260 for mode.

More specifically, based on the fact that the maximum number of occurrences of pseudo-ream is 7 in the earth mode and 31 in the space mode, the common pseudo-region can be used in any mode. A total of 31 250's are provided (common pseudo areas 250'-1 to 250'-31). In addition, considering that the maximum number of commands that can be output is 1146 in the earth mode and 46 in the space mode, each common pseudo region 250 can be used in any mode. Inside ´, 1146 storage areas are provided. Therefore, the total number of storage areas in the common pseudo area 250'in the comparative example is 35526 (= 1146 × 31). By making the common pseudo area 250'with such a structure, all the commands output by the effect control unit 210 can be stored in the common pseudo area 250'in the earth mode, the space mode, and the earth mode. Can be done.

However, when the common pseudo-region 250'is used in the earth mode, the pseudo-ream occurs only 7 times at the maximum. In this case, the common pseudo-region 250'-8 to 250'-31, that is, 24 The pseudo areas (total 27504 storage areas, which correspond to about 77.4% of the total common pseudo area 250') are not used at all. Further, when the common pseudo area 250'is used in the space mode, only 46 types of commands are output at the maximum. In this case, the areas in each of the common pseudo areas 250'-1 to 250'-31 are output. The 1100 storage areas of 47-1146 (a total of 34100 storage areas, which corresponds to about 96.0% of the total common pseudo area 250') are not used at all. As described above, in the common pseudo area 250', there are many unused storage areas, which is wasteful, and the limited capacity of the RAM 130' cannot be effectively utilized.

[Advantage of Embodiment]
FIG. 157 is a table showing a comparison between the embodiment and the comparative example regarding the usage mode of the RAM.

As described with reference to FIG. 152, in the embodiment, the pseudo region is provided with a structure different for each mode, and the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode is used in the earth mode, while the pseudo region 250 for the space mode is used in the space mode. Region 260 is used. Further, while 8022 storage areas (= 1146 × 7) are secured in the entire pseudo area 250 for the earth mode, 1426 storage areas (= 46 × 31) are secured in the entire pseudo area 260 for the space mode. Therefore, 9448 (= 8022 + 1426) storage areas are secured as the entire pseudo area including the earth mode pseudo area 250 and the space mode pseudo area 260.

On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 156, in the comparative example, the common pseudo region 250'is provided as a common region between the modes, and the common pseudo region 250'is also used in the earth mode and the space mode. To. Then, as a whole of the common pseudo area 250', 35526 storage areas (= 1146 × 31) are secured.

Therefore, when comparing the amount of RAM consumed by the pseudo area between the embodiment and the comparative example, the amount of RAM consumed by the pseudo region is overwhelmingly smaller, and the amount of RAM consumed in the example is about 26.6% of that of the comparative example. is there. From this, it can be seen that in the embodiment, the amount of RAM consumed is suppressed to about 1/4 of that of the comparative example.

Further, let's compare the time required for initializing each pseudo area under the assumption that the time required for each storage area is the same. In the embodiment, since the pseudo region is provided for each mode, it is sufficient to initialize only the pseudo region used (either the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode or the pseudo region 260 for the space mode). In the comparative example, even if there are unused storage areas and unused pseudo areas depending on the mode, the entire common pseudo area 250'must be initialized, so the embodiment overwhelmingly initializes. It can be done in a short time. More specifically, in the embodiment, the entire pseudo region 250 for the earth mode can be initialized in about 22.6% of the time of the comparative example in the earth mode, and about 4 of the comparative example in the space mode. The entire pseudo region 260 for space mode can be initialized in 0.0% of time.

As described above, according to the embodiment, the minimum required number of storage areas is secured in the pseudo area (unnecessary storage areas are not secured), so that the consumption of the RAM 130 is significantly suppressed. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the limited capacity of the RAM 130. Further, according to the embodiment, the time required for initializing the pseudo region can be significantly shortened, and the efficiency of the control process in the effect control CPU 126 can be improved. From these comparison results, the superiority of the embodiment is clear.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
Next, FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned effect symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control unit 210 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called waiting state for customers.
In addition, in the effect indicating the waiting state for customers, a content for preventing the devotion to the game such as "Be careful about the devotion to the game" may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily execute the effect related to the prevention of entanglement at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process as it is, and in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 148) and the lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 148), the content of the demo effect is displayed based on the demo effect pattern. Control.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or the outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S608. .. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is a jackpot. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control unit 210 executes a small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control unit 210 refers to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and selects the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. Can be done. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule (variation time) of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time. Determine the mode of stop display.

For example, when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the time shortened state, the effect control unit 210 changes the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 in the "drive mode" state, and finally corresponds to the small hit. The process of selecting the effect pattern for stopping and displaying the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.
On the other hand, when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the non-time shortened state, the effect control unit 210 changes the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2, for example, in the state where the "drive mode" is continued or in the normal mode. Then, the process of selecting the effect pattern Hz and the effect pattern Z2 corresponding to the small hit and finally displaying the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control unit 210 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control unit 210 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control unit 210 confirms that there is a deviation in step S604 (Yes), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of loss are classified into "out-of-time normal fluctuation", "time-saving out-of-time fluctuation", "out-of-reach variation", and the like, and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "out-of-reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control unit 210 selects is determined based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time (variation time and The presence or absence of reach occurrence, the reach type and reach occurrence timing in the case of reach occurrence), and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.) are determined. It should be noted that the method of determining the effect at the time of such a loss is the same at the time of a big hit.

When any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control unit 210 then executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control unit 210 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display effect this time by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or to notify that there is a possibility of a big hit or a small hit in the end. .. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set higher at the time of winning in order to raise the expectation of the player.

Step S616: The effect control unit 210 executes the mode effect management process (advantageous game state effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, in principle, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the normal mode when the internal state is the non-time shortened state, and when the internal state is the time shortened state, the effect control unit 210 executes the process. , Drive mode (more specifically, the mode selected by the player among the earth mode and the space mode. In the initial state, for example, the earth mode is selected). The process of selecting the middle effect) is executed.

However, as an exception, the effect control unit 210 has a memory of the second special symbol when the state shifts from the time shortened state to the non-time shortened state even when the internal state is the non-time shortened state. In this case, a background image corresponding to the drive mode is selected (advantageous gaming state effect executing means, advantageous gaming state effect continuous executing means). It should be noted that such an exceptional process is executed in the process during the display of the effect symbol stop, which will be described later.

By the way, when the effect pattern and the like of the variable effect are determined in step S608, step S610, and step S612 above, and the content of the advance notice effect is determined in step S614, the effect control unit 210 corresponds to the content of these effects. Various commands are stored in the pseudo area for the time being. At this time, when the earth mode is selected in the drive mode, or when the normal mode is set, the effect control unit 210 stores each command in a predetermined storage area in the pseudo area 250 for the earth mode. .. On the other hand, when the space mode is selected in the drive mode, the effect control unit 210 stores individual commands in a predetermined storage area in the space mode pseudo area 260. On that basis, the effect control unit 210 transfers the contents of the pseudo 1 region (earth mode pseudo region 250-1 or space mode pseudo region 260-1) to the execution region 240 immediately before the start of the pseudo 1. It will be copied to prepare for the start of fluctuations in the design.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent processing during effect symbol variation (step S504 in FIG. 150), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (symbol effect execution means). The notice effect is executed based on various notice effect patterns. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here.

[Processing during display of production symbol stop]
FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process during the display of the effect symbol stop display. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S650: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the internal state is during the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 can check the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checking the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by the fluctuation pattern command (hereinafter, the same applies).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S652, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control unit 210 Executes step S656.

Step S652: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the time reduction is the final variation. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 can access the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and check the number-cut counter command to check whether or not the time reduction is the final fluctuation. For example, if the first count cut counter value or the second count cut counter value fluctuates when switching from "1" to "0", the effect control unit 210 can determine that the time reduction final fluctuation.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the time reduction final variation is (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S654, and when it cannot be confirmed that the time reduction final variation is (No), the effect control unit 210 performs step S666. Execute.

Step S654: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of setting the storage number of the second special symbol in the pseudo time reduction counter. The pseudo time saving counter is stored in the RAM 130. For example, when the storage number of the second special symbol is "0", the pseudo time saving counter is set to "0" and the storage number of the second special symbol is "1". , "1" is set in the pseudo time reduction counter.
When this process is completed, the effect control unit 210 executes step S666.

Step S656: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the stay background is a normal background, that is, whether or not the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is a background image corresponding to the normal mode.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S666, and when it cannot be confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (No), the effect control unit 210 Executes step S658.

Step S658: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is larger than 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S660, and the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0. (No), that is, when the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is 0, the effect control unit 210 executes step S664.

Step S660: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of setting the stay background as a pseudo time-saving background. The pseudo time saving background is a drive mode background in which the right-handed display is not displayed.

By executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 has a pseudo time reduction counter even when the time reduction state (advantageous game state) ends and the time shifts to the non-time reduction state (predetermined game state). When the value of is larger than 0 (when a special condition is satisfied), the time-saving and medium-time effect (advantageous game state effect) can be continuously executed (advantageous game state effect continuous execution means). ).

Step S662: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo time reduction counter.

Step S664: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of setting the stay background as the normal background. The normal background is the background of the normal mode.

Step S666: The effect control unit 210 executes other processing. In other processing, as described above, the effect control unit 210 controls the content of the stop display effect in the mode according to the result of the internal lottery.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 150).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when the variable winning device is operated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S800: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the result of this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the lottery result command, and confirms whether it corresponds to a big hit or a small hit. As a result of this confirmation, if the result of this fluctuation is a big hit (Yes), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S802. On the other hand, if the result of this fluctuation is not a big hit (No), that is, if it is a small hit, the effect control unit 210 then executes step S804.

Step S802: The effect control unit 210 executes the process when the jackpot variable winning device is activated. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game.

Specifically, the effect control unit 210 instructs each individual control unit of the effect content corresponding to the selected effect pattern. In response to this, for example, the display control unit 220 wins, for example, various effect images corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of a big hit stored in the CGROM 190 in advance as a large role effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 for the VDP 152. Instruct to read according to the design.

Step S804: The effect control unit 210 executes the small hit variable winning device operation time process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit.

Specifically, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern indicating that the small hit game has started at the start of the small hit game and an effect pattern suggesting right-handed hitting, and the game ball is played during the small hit game. When passing through the specific area 31x, the effect pattern at the time of passing through the specific area is selected, and the effect contents corresponding to these effect patterns are instructed to each individual control unit. In response to this, for example, the display control unit 220 reads out from the VDP 152 an effect image showing how the car on which the female character is riding speeds up and an effect image suggesting right-handed strike at the start of the small hit game. In addition, when passing through a specific area, a female character in a car is instructed to read out a production image showing a state in which a heart mark with the letter V is drawn.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 150).

[Time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium and other production processing]
FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the time saving medium, the pseudo time saving medium, and other effect processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Here, the time reduction medium (time reduction) is a time reduction state, and the pseudo time reduction medium (pseudo time reduction) is a state in which the background image during the time reduction is displayed in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction state). Drive mode).

Step S850: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the internal state is during the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 can check the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checking the state designation command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes steps S852 and S854, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect is produced. The control unit 210 executes step S856.

Step S852: The effect control unit 210 executes the remaining number display process based on the remaining time reduction number. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the count cut counter command, and displays an effect pattern in which the value obtained by adding "1" to the second count cut counter value is displayed as the remaining number of times. Execute the selected process. As a result, during the time reduction, the value of "remaining 2 times" or "remaining 1 time" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Step S854: The effect control unit 210 executes a right-handed suggestion effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the right-handed suggestion effect at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S855: The effect control unit 210 executes the right-handed emphasis effect selection process. Specifically, when the effect control unit 210 needs to execute the right-handed emphasis effect, for example, when the player continues to left-handed even though the time has been shortened (particularly). , 5th variation or 10th variation of the first special symbol), a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the effect of emphasizing right-handed striking at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 is executed.

Step S856: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction. When the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0, the effect control unit 210 can determine that the pseudo time saving is in progress.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S858, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (No), the effect control The unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 148).

Step S858: The effect control unit 210 executes the remaining number display process based on the pseudo time reduction counter. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying the value of the pseudo time reduction counter as the remaining number of times. As a result, in the pseudo time reduction, the value of "remaining 1 time (last)" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 148).

[Drum unit production management process]
FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the drum unit effect management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S900: The effect control unit 210 executes the movable body operation schedule determination process. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 has an operation schedule (variation mode, stop mode, etc.) of the drum unit 200 based on the effect pattern (effect pattern number, etc.) determined by the effect symbol management process (step S402 in FIG. 148). ) Is executed.

When the operation schedule is determined, the effect control unit 210 stores the determined operation schedule in the operation schedule storage buffer of the RAM 130. Further, when the operation schedule is determined, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of turning on the drum unit operating flag of the RAM 130, and executes a process of turning off the drum unit operating flag when all the determined schedules are executed. To do.

The operation schedule is set for each reel (each movable body). For example, in the case of the left reel 201, "acceleration"-> "constant velocity"-> "deceleration"-> "stop" in order from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation. And so on. Among them, "acceleration" and "deceleration" have a plurality of speed changes, and "constant speed" may also have a plurality of speed changes (for example, "low speed constant speed", "medium speed, etc." "Speed", "High speed constant speed", etc.).

In the present embodiment, a plurality of speeds (for example, about 100 types of speeds) are prepared as the set speeds of the motor (reel), and various setting information (number of steps of the motor) is provided in a plurality of movable body data tables (not shown). , The set speed of the motor, the time required for the operation of the motor, the excitation method of the motor, the phase designation information for specifying the phase to be excited by the motor, etc.) are stored. Different setting information is stored in each movable body data table.

The movable body control unit 226 determines which movable body data table is referred to in what order and at what timing based on the operation schedule of the drum unit (movable body unit) 200. The movable body data stored in the movable body data table being referred to is transmitted to the driver (IC) of the drum unit 200 by being stored in the movable body data setting area (not shown). The driver of the drum unit 200 drives each reel based on the movable body data.

The movable body control unit 226 basically overwrites the new movable body data in the movable body data setting area (switches the movable body data table being referenced) when the speed of each reel is changed. However, even when the speed of each reel is maintained, new movable body data may be overwritten in the movable body data setting area (the moving body data table being referenced is not switched).

This is because, when maintaining a constant speed, if a number of movable data tables corresponding to the number of fluctuation seconds of the special symbol is prepared, the number of movable data tables corresponding to the number of fluctuation seconds of the special symbol will be displayed. This is because the capacity of the movable data table becomes large.

The operation schedule of the drum unit 200 corresponding to the effect pattern is as follows.
For example, when the effect pattern is an effect pattern corresponding to the non-reach out-of-reach effect, the movable body control unit 226 starts the rotation of the left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 at the start of the fluctuation, and left after a predetermined time elapses. The operation schedule is such that the reel 201 is stopped, then the right reel 203 is stopped, and finally the middle reel 202 is stopped. The stop stitch can be an arbitrary shift stitch or a stop stitch corresponding to the stop stitch of the effect symbol Hz.

On the other hand, when the effect pattern is an effect pattern corresponding to the reach effect (big hit variation, small hit variation, missed variation), the movable body control unit 226 rotates the left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 at the start of the variation. Is started, the left reel 201 is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, then the right reel 203 is stopped, a reach state is generated, and finally the middle reel 202 is stopped. The stop stitches correspond to the stop stitches corresponding to the stop stitches of the production symbol Hz (three sets of seven symbols of the same color corresponding to the big hit, the three sets of cherry symbols corresponding to the small hits, and the misses. It can be set to the deviation of one frame of the middle reel 202).

In any case, the effect control unit 210 determines the operation schedule of the drum unit 200 based on the effect pattern determined by the effect symbol management process in the movable body operation schedule determination process. Further, the movable body control unit 226 refers to a movable body data table (deceleration sequence, deceleration sequence to which a control code is added, acceleration sequence, drive start sequence, drive stop sequence, etc.) to be referred to during the production based on the determined operation schedule. Determine the content and order of.

Step S902: The effect control unit 210 (or the movable body control unit 226) executes the movable body data setting start process. This process is executed only when the setting of the movable body data is started during the execution of the effect, that is, when the movable body data is overwritten.

Specifically, the effect control unit 210 (or the movable body control unit 226) overwrites the movable body data of the currently referenced movable body data table with the movable body data of the movable body data table to be referred to next. That is, the process of storing the movable body data stored in the movable body data table to be referred to next in the movable body data setting area is executed, and whether or not it is the end of the movable body data is determined. (Check if there is a movable body data table to be referred to next), and move the movable body data stored in the movable body data table until it is determined that it is the end of the movable body data. Executes the process of storing in the data setting area.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 148).

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a transition example of a special fluctuation pattern of measures for immediate termination of the consecutive villa state.
In the figure (A), a transition example of the special variation pattern when the game is played without following the transition in the firing direction is shown.
For example, when the time reduction state ends and the state shifts to the non-time reduction state, and the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the non-time reduction state (during the left-handed state), one special symbol memory is stored. When the second special symbol became a small hit or a big hit in the memory of the second special symbol and the time was shortened at the end of the big hit game, that is, the launch of the game ball was stopped during the memory digestion of the second special symbol. In this case, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "first variation", the "variation pattern table D (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table". The table selected here may be the "variable pattern table E (second special symbol)".
Specifically, the first variation after the jackpot game ends is the variation of the second special symbol after the memory digestion of the second special symbol (variation time is 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation (reach effect) dedicated to the second special symbol can be executed.

In the figure (B), a transition example of the special variation pattern when the game is played according to the transition in the firing direction is shown.
For example, when the time reduction state ends and the state shifts to the non-time reduction state, and the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the non-time reduction state (during the left-handed state), four special symbol memories are stored. If you save and become a small hit or a big hit in the memory of the second special symbol, and shift to the time shortened state at the end of the big hit game, that is, hit left during the memory digestion of the second special symbol and hit the first special symbol When four memories are stored, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table D (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are fluctuations of the 1st special symbol after the memory digestion of the 2nd special symbol (variation time is about 90 to 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation dedicated to the first special symbol can be executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table D (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table". The table selected here may be the "variable pattern table E (second special symbol)".
Specifically, the fifth variation after the end of the jackpot game is the variation of the second special symbol after the memory digestion of the second special symbol (variation time is 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation dedicated to the second special symbol can be executed.
By executing the striking method shown in (B) in the figure, it is possible to avoid the immediate end of the consecutive villa state (the situation where the consecutive villa state ends immediately).

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a transition example of a special fluctuation pattern in consideration of irregular striking.
In the figure (A), a transition example of the special variation pattern when the game is played according to the firing direction is shown.
For example, if four memories of the first special symbol are accumulated before the first hit and right-handed is continued in a state of shortening the time after the end of the big hit game, that is, all the memories of the first special symbol are digested and the first 2 When the memory of the special symbol is stored, the transition of the special fluctuation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table C (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the fifth variation after the end of the big hit game (the first variation of the second special symbol after the first hit) is a long variation (variation time is 120 seconds).

In the figure (B), an example of the transition of the special fluctuation pattern when the game is played without following the firing direction is shown.
For example, when four memories of the first special symbol are accumulated before the first hit, and the left hit is continued even though the time is shortened after the big hit game is completed, that is, the first hit. When all the memories of the special symbol are digested and the time reduction state ends (punctures) by continuing to accumulate the memory of the first special symbol, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table G (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the fifth variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a long variation (variation time is 13.5 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, it is possible to execute an effect of urging the variable start winning device 28 (electric chew) to win a game ball (effect of urging a right-handed hit) (first time).

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "sixth to ninth variation", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the 6th to 9th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. .. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "10th variation", the "variation pattern table G (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the tenth variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a long variation (variation time is 13.5 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, it is possible to execute an effect of urging the variable start winning device 28 (electric chew) to win a game ball (effect of urging a right-handed hit) (second time).

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "11th variation", the "variation pattern table A (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the eleventh variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a variation based on the variation pattern included in the variation pattern table A. After the end of the time reduction (puncture), the normal state (non-time reduction state, normal mode) is entered.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, the command stored in the execution area 240 by the effect control unit 210 is ACT to each individual control unit (display control unit 220, voice control unit 222, lamp control unit 224, movable body control). Since it is transmitted to the unit 226, etc. and the operation of each effect device is controlled by each individual control unit based on the same command, the operation of a plurality of effect devices can be uniquely specified and controlled by the same command. ..

(2) According to the present embodiment, since a pseudo area is provided separately from the execution area 240, various commands output by the effect control unit 210 are temporarily stored in the execution area 240. Can be stored as a target.

(3) According to the present embodiment, the earth mode is used as a pseudo region having a structure suitable for storing commands output for controlling the production in each production mode in which the characteristics (how to show and tendencies) of the production are different. Is provided with a pseudo region 250 for the earth mode, and a pseudo region 260 for the space mode is provided for the space mode, so that the amount of RAM used can be suppressed.

(4) According to the present embodiment, as a structure suitable for each effect mode, the number of pseudo areas having storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of commands that can be output in each effect mode is corresponding to the maximum number of pseudo stations. Is provided only. Specifically, for the earth mode, seven pseudo regions 250 for the earth mode having 1146 storage areas are provided (pseudo regions for the earth mode 250-1 to 250-7), and for the space mode, the pseudo regions 250 for the earth mode are provided. Since 31 space mode pseudo areas 260 having 46 storage areas are provided (space mode pseudo areas 260-1 to 260-31), RAM is not secured in any mode. The amount of use can be minimized.

(5) According to the present embodiment, the size of the pseudo area (total number of storage areas in the pseudo area) used in each effect mode is suppressed to the minimum, so that the initialization process performed after the use of the pseudo area is performed. This can be performed in a short time, and the efficiency of the control process in the effect control CPU 126 can be improved.

(6) According to the present embodiment, the size of the pseudo area (total number of storage areas in the pseudo area) used in each effect mode is suppressed to the minimum, so that the remaining area of the RAM 130 is used for other processing. It can be allocated and the limited capacity of the RAM 130 can be effectively utilized.

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of effect given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of effect described above.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect control unit 210 stores the command in the execution area 240, and the ACT executes the command at a predetermined timing for each individual control unit (display control unit 220, voice control unit 222, lamp control unit 224, Although it is transmitted to the movable body control unit 226), the transmission mode of the command is not limited to this. For example, the command output by the effect control unit 210 is not stored in the execution area 240, but directly in each individual control unit (display control unit 220, voice control unit 222, lamp control unit 224, movable body control unit 226). It may be configured to transmit to. Alternatively, each individual control unit may directly refer to the command stored in the execution area 240 without transmitting the command by ACT.

In the above-described embodiment, the number of pseudo areas corresponding to the maximum number of pseudo-series is provided, and the command corresponding to the effect executed in relation to the pseudo variation of each time is stored in the pseudo area for each time (for example). The command corresponding to the effect executed in connection with the first pseudo-variation is stored in the pseudo-region), but the usage mode of the pseudo-region is not limited to this. For example, when an addition scale (adjustment of fluctuation time) occurs in a fluctuation in which the pseudo-ream is not executed up to the maximum number of times, the pseudo area is used to store the command corresponding to the effect executed in the section of the addition scale. Alternatively, when reach occurs a plurality of times, it is also possible to use one pseudo region for each reach.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, but the present invention may be applied to a so-called type 1 game machine (a game machine not provided with a specific area).
The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation function, and in this case, it can also be applied to a so-called loop type gaming machine (a type in which a substantial upper limit is not set for the number of probability variations). It can also be applied to ST type gaming machines (a type that sets a substantial upper limit on the number of probability changes).
Further, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation region, or can be applied to a gaming machine having no probability variation region.
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a game machine that does not adopt "simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol", and can also be applied to a game machine that adopts simultaneous rotation. ..

In the above-described embodiment, the game machine including the drum unit 200 has been described as an example, but the game machine may not have the drum unit 200.
Further, the drum unit 200 may be changed to a 7-segment display (for example, a device including a plurality of 7-segment displays, a 7-segment display for displaying an effect symbol), or may be changed to a liquid crystal display.

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately deformed.

1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game status display device 42 Liquid crystal display 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU
2007 7-segment display device 300 Storage display device

Claims (1)

Operation means that can accept operation input and
Using the operation means, a stepwise effect executing means that enables a stepwise effect to progress the stage of the effect step by step from the first stage to the final stage,
If the predetermined conditions are not satisfied from the start to the end of the effective time for validating the operation of the operation means, the stage of the stage effect is advanced according to the first progress mode, and the predetermined conditions are met. If is satisfied, the gaming machine is provided with a progress effect executing means capable of executing a progress effect that advances the stage of the effect of the stage effect by a second progress mode different from the first progress mode. ..